WO2012176459A1 - 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 - Google Patents
送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2012176459A1 WO2012176459A1 PCT/JP2012/004036 JP2012004036W WO2012176459A1 WO 2012176459 A1 WO2012176459 A1 WO 2012176459A1 JP 2012004036 W JP2012004036 W JP 2012004036W WO 2012176459 A1 WO2012176459 A1 WO 2012176459A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- data
- phase
- signal
- symbol
- mimo
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
- H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
- H04B7/0689—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using different transmission schemes, at least one of them being a diversity transmission scheme
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/022—Site diversity; Macro-diversity
- H04B7/024—Co-operative use of antennas of several sites, e.g. in co-ordinated multipoint or co-operative multiple-input multiple-output [MIMO] systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
- H04B7/0868—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining
- H04B7/0871—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining using different reception schemes, at least one of them being a diversity reception scheme
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0045—Arrangements at the receiver end
- H04L1/0047—Decoding adapted to other signal detection operation
- H04L1/005—Iterative decoding, including iteration between signal detection and decoding operation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0045—Arrangements at the receiver end
- H04L1/0055—MAP-decoding
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0057—Block codes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0064—Concatenated codes
- H04L1/0065—Serial concatenated codes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/02—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by diversity reception
- H04L1/06—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by diversity reception using space diversity
- H04L1/0618—Space-time coding
- H04L1/0637—Properties of the code
- H04L1/0643—Properties of the code block codes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L25/00—Baseband systems
- H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
- H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
- H04L25/0204—Channel estimation of multiple channels
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L25/00—Baseband systems
- H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
- H04L25/03—Shaping networks in transmitter or receiver, e.g. adaptive shaping networks
- H04L25/03891—Spatial equalizers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
- H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
- H04L27/38—Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
- H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
- H04B7/046—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting taking physical layer constraints into account
- H04B7/0469—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting taking physical layer constraints into account taking special antenna structures, e.g. cross polarized antennas into account
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/10—Polarisation diversity; Directional diversity
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L2001/0092—Error control systems characterised by the topology of the transmission link
- H04L2001/0097—Relays
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L25/00—Baseband systems
- H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
- H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
- H04L25/0222—Estimation of channel variability, e.g. coherence bandwidth, coherence time, fading frequency
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L25/00—Baseband systems
- H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
- H04L25/03—Shaping networks in transmitter or receiver, e.g. adaptive shaping networks
- H04L25/03891—Spatial equalizers
- H04L25/03898—Spatial equalizers codebook-based design
- H04L25/0391—Spatial equalizers codebook-based design construction details of matrices
Definitions
- the present invention particularly relates to a transmission device and a reception device that perform communication using a multi-antenna.
- Non-Patent Document 14 there is a transmission apparatus capable of executing communication using SISO (Single Input Single Output) and communication using MISO (Multiple Input Single Output) (see, for example, Non-Patent Document 14).
- SISO Single Input Single Output
- MISO Multiple Input Single Output
- DVB Document A122 Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial broadcasting system
- T2 (DVB-D8)-DVB Document A122 Framing structure, channel coding and modulation L. Vangelista, N.A. Benvenuto, and S.M. Tomasin, “Key technologies for next-generation terrestrial digital television standard DVB-T2,” IEEE Commun. Magazine, vo. 47, no. 10, pp. 146-153, Oct. 2009. T. T. et al. Ohgane, T. Nishimura, and Y.
- ETSI EN 302 307 “Second generation framing structure, channel coding and modulation systems for broadcasting services, new berthetics, and other severating lithivalents. 1.1.2, June 2006. Y. -L. Ueng, and C.I. -C. Cheng, “a fast-convergence decoding method and memory-efficient VLSI decoder architecture for irregular LDPC codes in the IEEE 802.16E standard E. 1255-1259.
- S. M.M. Alamouti “A simple transmission diversity technology for wireless communications,” IEEE J. Select. Areas Commun. , Vol. 16, no. 8, pp. 1451-1458, Oct 1998.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a frame structure capable of facilitating signal detection on the receiving side when transmitting a signal while switching between SISO and MISO communications.
- a transmission apparatus is a transmission apparatus having a function of executing communication in SISO (Single Input Single Output), MISO (Multiple Input Single Output), and MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output), and transmits data to be transmitted.
- SISO Single Input Single Output
- MISO Multiple Input Single Output
- MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output
- the SISO data is collected to form a SISO frame
- the MISO data and the MIMO data are collected to form a MISO / MIMO frame, the SISO frame, and the MISO /
- a transmission unit that transmits a MIMO frame, wherein the frame configuration unit receives a control symbol for transmitting a control signal, and SISO data or the MISO data and MIMO data following the control symbol.
- the number of transmission antennas for transmitting the control symbol is set to the same number as the number of transmission antennas used for transmitting data symbols following the control symbol. It is characterized by that.
- a transmission method and a reception method having a frame structure that facilitates signal detection on the reception side A transmitting device and a receiving device can be provided.
- Example of configuration of transmission / reception device in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system Example of frame configuration
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Frame configuration example
- Example of phase change method Example of receiver configuration
- Configuration example of signal processing unit of receiving apparatus Configuration example of signal processing unit of receiving apparatus
- Decryption processing method Example of reception status
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Frame configuration Example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example
- Example of mapping method Example of mapping method
- Example of weighted composition unit configuration Example of how symbols are rearranged
- Example of configuration of transmission / reception device in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system Example of BER characteristics
- Example of phase change method Example of phase change method
- Example of phase change method Example of phase change method
- Example of phase change method Example of
- Example subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration Example subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration Transmission frame structure SP placement example in sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol Diagram showing DVB-T2 actual service network (SISO) Diagram showing Distributed-MISO using existing transmit antennas Diagram showing the structure of Co-sited-MIMO Diagram showing a configuration that combines Distributed-MISO and Co-sited-MIMO Subframe structure example based on transmit antenna configuration (considering polarization) Transmission frame structure example Example subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration (considering transmit power) Transmission frame structure example Subframe structure example based on transmit antenna configuration (considering polarization and transmit power) Transmission frame structure example Example subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration Example subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration Example subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration (appropriate subframe order) Example subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration (appropriate subframe order) Transmission frame structure example Subframe structure example based on transmit antenna configuration (considering polarization) Subframe structure example based on transmit antenna configuration (considering polarization)
- Example with subframe structure based on transmit antenna configuration (appropriate subframe order, considering transmit power switching pattern) Transmission frame structure example The figure which shows the example of the transmission power switching pattern (a polarization is also considered) of SISO and MISO / MIMO
- MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output
- FIG. 23 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission / reception apparatus when the number of transmission antennas is 2, the number of reception antennas is 2, and the number of transmission modulation signals (transmission streams) is 2.
- the encoded data is interleaved, the interleaved data is modulated, frequency conversion or the like is performed to generate a transmission signal, and the transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna.
- a scheme in which different modulation signals are transmitted from the transmission antenna to the same frequency at the same time is the spatial multiplexing MIMO scheme.
- Patent Document 1 proposes a transmission apparatus having a different interleave pattern for each transmission antenna. That is, in the transmission device of FIG. 23, two interleaves ( ⁇ a, ⁇ b) have different interleave patterns. Then, as shown in Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2, the reception apparatus improves the reception quality by repeatedly performing a detection method using a soft value (MIMO detector in FIG. 23). Will do.
- a soft value MIMO detector in FIG. 23
- NLOS non-line of sight
- LOS line of sight
- a LOS environment In the case of transmitting a single modulated signal in a transmitting device, performing maximum ratio combining on signals received by a plurality of antennas in a receiving device, and performing demodulation and decoding on the signal after maximum ratio combining, a LOS environment, In particular, good reception quality can be obtained in an environment where the rice factor indicating the magnitude of the reception power of the direct wave with respect to the reception power of the scattered wave is large.
- BER Bit Error Rate
- SNR signal-to-noise power ratio
- FIGS. 24A and 24B show the BER characteristics of Max-log-APP (Non-patent Document 1 and Non-patent Document 2) (APP: a posteriprobability) in which iterative detection is not performed, and FIG.
- the BER characteristics of Max-log-APP see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2) (5 iterations) subjected to detection are shown.
- FIGS. 24A and 24B regardless of whether or not iterative detection is performed, in the spatial multiplexing MIMO system, it can be confirmed that reception quality deteriorates as the rice factor increases.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO system has a problem inherent to the spatial multiplexing MIMO system, which is not found in a conventional system that transmits a single modulation signal, such as “the reception quality deteriorates when the propagation environment becomes stable”. Recognize.
- Broadcasting and multicast communication are services that have to deal with various propagation environments, and it is natural that the radio wave propagation environment between the receiver and broadcast station owned by the user is a LOS environment.
- a spatial multiplexing MIMO system with the above-mentioned problems is used for broadcasting or multicast communication, a phenomenon occurs in which the receiver receives a service due to a deterioration in reception quality although the received electric field strength of radio waves is high. there is a possibility.
- Non-Patent Document 8 describes a method of selecting a codebook (precoding matrix (also referred to as precoding weight matrix)) used for precoding from feedback information from a communication partner. In a situation where feedback information from a communication partner cannot be obtained as in multicast communication, there is no description of a method for performing precoding.
- precoding matrix also referred to as precoding weight matrix
- Non-Patent Document 4 describes a method of switching a precoding matrix with time, which can be applied even when there is no feedback information.
- a unitary matrix is used as a matrix used for precoding and that the unitary matrix is switched at random.
- the application method for the degradation of reception quality in the LOS environment described above It is not described at all, and only switching at random is described.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a MIMO system capable of improving the reception quality in the LOS environment.
- the configuration of the N t ⁇ N r spatial multiplexing MIMO system is shown in FIG.
- the information vector z is encoded and interleaved.
- u i (u i1 ,..., U iM ) (M: number of transmission bits per symbol).
- the transmission vector s (s 1 ,..., S Nt ) T
- 2 ⁇ Es / Nt (E s : total energy per channel).
- equation (6) can be expressed as equation (7).
- the posterior L-value is expressed as follows in MAP or APP (a posteriori probability).
- FIG. 23 shows a basic configuration of a system that leads to the following description.
- a 2 ⁇ 2 spatial multiplexing MIMO system is used, and streams A and B each have an outer encoder, and the two outer encoders are encoders of the same LDPC code (in this case, an LDPC code encoder is used as the outer encoder).
- the error correction code used by the outer encoder is not limited to the LDPC code, and other error correction codes such as a turbo code, a convolutional code, and an LDPC convolutional code are used in the same manner.
- the outer encoder is configured to be provided for each transmission antenna, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and there may be a plurality of transmission antennas or a single outer encoder. Has more outer encoders than antennas Even if it is.).
- the modulation scheme is 2 h -QAM (h bits are transmitted in one symbol).
- the receiver performs the above-described MIMO signal iterative detection (iterative APP (or Max-log APP) decoding). Then, as decoding of the LDPC code, for example, sum-product decoding is performed.
- iterative APP or Max-log APP
- FIG. 2 shows a frame structure and describes the order of symbols after interleaving. At this time, it is assumed that (i a , j a ) and (i b , j b ) are expressed as in the following equations.
- i a , i b order of symbols after interleaving
- ⁇ a , ⁇ b stream A and B interleavers
- ⁇ a ia, ja , ⁇ b ib, jb The order of data before interleaving of streams A and B is shown.
- ⁇ Iterative decoding> Here, the sum-product decoding and the iterative detection algorithm of the MIMO signal used for decoding the LDPC code in the receiver will be described in detail.
- a (m) means a set of column indexes that are 1 in the m-th row of the check matrix H
- B (n) is a set of row indexes that are 1 in the n-th row of the check matrix H.
- the sum-product decoding algorithm is as follows.
- Step A ⁇ 4 (calculation of log-likelihood ratio):
- the log-likelihood ratio L n is obtained as follows for n ⁇ [1, N].
- the above is one sum-product decoding operation. Thereafter, iterative detection of the MIMO signal is performed.
- the variables in the stream A are denoted by m a , n a , ⁇ a mana , ⁇ a mana , ⁇ na, L na
- n a , n b ⁇ [1, N].
- ⁇ na , L na , ⁇ nb , and L nb at the iteration number k of the MIMO signal iterative detection are represented as ⁇ k, na , L k, na , ⁇ k, nb , L k, nb , respectively.
- FIG. 3 shows an example of the configuration of transmitting apparatus 300 in the present embodiment.
- the encoding unit 302A receives the information (data) 301A and the frame configuration signal 313 as input, and the frame configuration signal 313 (the error correction method used by the encoding unit 302A for error correction encoding of data, the encoding rate, the block length, etc.)
- the frame configuration signal 313 the error correction method used by the encoding unit 302A for error correction encoding of data, the encoding rate, the block length, etc.
- a convolutional code, an LDPC code, a turbo code, or the like may be used in accordance with a method specified by the frame configuration signal 313. Error correction encoding is performed, and encoded data 303A is output.
- the interleaver 304A receives the encoded data 303A and the frame configuration signal 313, performs interleaving, that is, rearranges the order, and outputs the interleaved data 305A. (The interleaving method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
- the mapping unit 306A receives the interleaved data 305A and the frame configuration signal 313 as input and performs QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), etc.
- the signal 307A is output.
- the modulation method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.
- FIG. 19 shows an example of a mapping method on the IQ plane of the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q constituting the baseband signal in QPSK modulation.
- FIG. 19B is an example of a mapping method on the IQ plane of QPSK modulation different from FIG. 19A, and FIG. 19B is different from FIG. 19A in that FIG. The signal point in FIG. 19B can be obtained by rotating the signal point around the origin.
- FIG. 20 shows a signal point arrangement on the IQ plane in the case of 16QAM, and an example corresponding to FIG. 19A is FIG. 20A, and FIG. An example corresponding to is shown in FIG.
- Encoding section 302B receives information (data) 301B and frame configuration signal 313 as input, and includes frame configuration signal 313 (including information such as an error correction method to be used, a coding rate, and a block length).
- the error correction method may be switched, for example, error correction coding such as convolutional code, LDPC code, turbo code, etc., and the encoded data.
- 303B is output.
- the interleaver 304B receives the encoded data 303B and the frame configuration signal 313, performs interleaving, that is, rearranges the order, and outputs the interleaved data 305B. (The interleaving method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
- the mapping unit 306B receives the interleaved data 305B and the frame configuration signal 313, and performs QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), and so on.
- the signal 307B is output.
- the modulation method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.
- the signal processing method information generation unit 314 receives the frame configuration signal 313 and outputs information 315 related to the signal processing method based on the frame configuration signal 313.
- the information 315 relating to the signal processing method includes information specifying which precoding matrix is to be used in a fixed manner and information on a phase change pattern for changing the phase.
- the weighting / synthesizing unit 308A receives the baseband signal 307A, the baseband signal 307B, and the information 315 related to the signal processing method as inputs, and weights and combines the baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B based on the information 315 related to the signal processing method.
- the signal 309A after the weighted synthesis is output. The details of the weighting synthesis method will be described later in detail.
- Radio section 310A receives signal 309A after weighted synthesis, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, and outputs transmission signal 311A.
- Transmission signal 311A is output as a radio wave from antenna 312A.
- the weighting / synthesizing unit 308B receives the baseband signal 307A, the baseband signal 307B, and the information 315 related to the signal processing method as inputs, and weights and combines the baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B based on the information 315 related to the signal processing method.
- the signal 316B after the weighted synthesis is output.
- FIG. 21 shows the configuration of the weighting synthesis unit (308A, 308B).
- a region surrounded by a dotted line is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the baseband signal 307A is multiplied by w11 to generate w11 ⁇ s1 (t), and is multiplied by w21 to generate w21 ⁇ s1 (t).
- the baseband signal 307B is multiplied by w12 to generate w12 ⁇ s2 (t), and is multiplied by w22 to generate w22 ⁇ s2 (t).
- s1 (t) and s2 (t) are BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Shift Keying), QPSK, 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Shift Keying), 16 QAM, 32 QAM (32 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), It becomes a baseband signal of a modulation scheme such as 64QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK (16 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying).
- both weighting combining sections perform weighting using a fixed precoding matrix.
- the precoding matrix the following equation (37) or equation (38) is used under the condition There is a method using (36).
- the precoding matrix is a
- precoding matrix is not limited to the equation (36), and the one shown in the equation (39) may be used.
- a Ae j ⁇ 11
- b Be j ⁇ 12
- c Ce j ⁇ 21
- any one of a, b, c, and d may be “zero”.
- (2) b zero, a, c, d is not zero
- (3) c zero, a, b , D is not zero
- (4) d may be zero
- a, b, and c may be non-zero.
- the precoding matrix to be used may be set and changed, and the precoding matrix may be used fixedly.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives the signal 316B after weighted synthesis and the information 315 regarding the signal processing method as inputs, and regularly changes and outputs the phase of the signal 316B. To change regularly, the phase is changed according to a predetermined phase change pattern at a predetermined cycle (for example, every n symbols (n is an integer of 1 or more) or every predetermined time). . Details of the phase change pattern will be described in a fourth embodiment below.
- Radio section 310B receives signal 309B after the phase change, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, and outputs transmission signal 311B.
- Transmission signal 311B is output as a radio wave from antenna 312B.
- FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of a transmission apparatus 400 different from FIG. In FIG. 4, a different part from FIG. 3 is demonstrated.
- the encoding unit 402 receives the information (data) 401 and the frame configuration signal 313, performs error correction encoding based on the frame configuration signal 313, and outputs the encoded data 402.
- the distribution unit 404 receives the encoded data 403, distributes it, and outputs data 405A and data 405B.
- the encoding unit is m (m is an integer of 1 or more), and the codes created by each encoding unit
- the present invention can also be implemented in the same way when the distribution unit outputs divided data into two systems of data.
- FIG. 5 shows an example of a frame configuration on the time axis of the transmission apparatus according to the present embodiment.
- Symbol 500_1 is a symbol for notifying the receiving apparatus of the transmission method. For example, an error correction method used for transmitting a data symbol, information on its coding rate, and a modulation method used for transmitting a data symbol The information etc. is transmitted.
- Symbol 501_1 is a symbol for estimating the channel fluctuation of modulated signal z1 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u (on the time axis), and symbol 503_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- Symbol 501_2 is a symbol for estimating channel fluctuation of modulated signal z2 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u
- symbol 503_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- the symbols at the same time are transmitted from the transmission antenna using the same (common) frequency.
- 504 # 1 and 504 # 2 indicate transmission antennas in the transmission apparatus
- 505 # 1 and 505 # 2 indicate reception antennas in the reception apparatus
- the transmission apparatus transmits the modulated signal z1 (t) to the transmission antenna 504.
- # 1 modulated signal z2 (t) is transmitted from transmitting antenna 504 # 2.
- the channel fluctuation of each transmission antenna of the transmission device and each antenna of the reception device is set to h11 (t), h12 (t), h21 (t), and h22 (t), respectively, and reception received by the reception antenna 505 # 1 of the reception device.
- the signal is r1 (t) and the received signal received by the receiving antenna 505 # 2 of the receiving device is r2 (t)
- the following relational expression is established.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram related to the weighting method (precoding method) and the phase changing method in the present embodiment, and the weighting synthesis unit 600 integrates both the weighting synthesis units 308A and 308B of FIG. It is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
- the in-phase I component and quadrature Q component of the band signal is a diagram related to the weighting method (precoding method) and the phase changing method in the present embodiment, and the weighting synthesis unit 600 integrates both the weighting synthesis units 308A and 308B of FIG. It is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping
- the stream s1 (t) represents the signal with symbol number u as s1 (u), the signal with symbol number u + 1 as s1 (u + 1), and so on.
- a signal with a symbol number u is represented as s2 (u)
- a signal with a symbol number u + 1 is represented as s2 (u + 1), and so on.
- the weighting / synthesizing unit 600 receives the baseband signals 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)) and the information 315 related to the signal processing method in FIG. 3, and performs weighting according to the information 315 related to the signal processing method.
- the phase changing unit 317B changes the phase of the weighted signal 316B (z2 '(t)) and outputs a signal 309B (z2 (t)) after the phase change.
- y (t) is an expression for changing the phase in accordance with a predetermined method.
- the phase change expression at time u is expressed by, for example, Expression (43). be able to.
- phase change equation at time u + 1 can be expressed by equation (44), for example.
- phase change equation at time u + k can be expressed by equation (45).
- the regular phase change cycle is not limited to 4. If the number of periods increases, there is a possibility that the reception performance (more precisely, error correction performance) of the receiving apparatus can be improved accordingly. It's likely that you should avoid small values such as.)
- phase change examples shown in the above equations (43) to (45) the configuration in which the rotation is sequentially rotated by a predetermined phase (in the above equation, by ⁇ / 2) is shown.
- the phase may be changed randomly.
- the phase by which y (t) is multiplied in the order as shown in Expression (46) or Expression (47) may be changed according to a predetermined cycle.
- What is important in the regular change of the phase is that the phase of the modulation signal is changed regularly, and the degree of the phase to be changed is made as uniform as possible, for example, from ⁇ radians to ⁇ radians.
- phase changing unit 317B determines the phase of the input signal and the degree of change. Change while changing.
- the reception quality may be greatly improved.
- the special precoding matrix depends on the phase and amplitude components of the direct wave when received. Different.
- there is a certain rule in the LOS environment If the phase of the transmission signal is regularly changed in accordance with this rule, the data reception quality is greatly improved.
- the present invention proposes a signal processing method that improves the LOS environment.
- FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of receiving apparatus 700 in the present embodiment.
- Radio section 703_X receives reception signal 702_X received by antenna 701_X, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_X.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h11 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 706_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h12 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 706_2 is output.
- Radio section 703_Y receives reception signal 702_Y received by antenna 701_Y, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_Y.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted from the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_Y as input, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h21 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 708_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted from the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_Y as input, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h22 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 708_2 is output.
- Control information decoding section 709 receives baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, detects symbol 500_1 for notifying the transmission method of FIG. 5, and outputs a signal 710 related to information on the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus.
- the signal processing unit 711 receives the baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, the channel estimation signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, and 708_2, and the signal 710 related to the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus, performs detection and decoding, and performs reception data 712_1 and 712_2 are output.
- FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of the signal processing unit 711 in the present embodiment.
- FIG. 8 mainly includes an INNER MIMO detection unit, a soft-in / soft-out decoder, and a coefficient generation unit.
- the details of the iterative decoding method in this configuration are described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3, but the MIMO transmission methods described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 are spatial multiplexing MIMO transmissions.
- the transmission method in this embodiment is a MIMO transmission method in which the phase of a signal is regularly changed with time and a precoding matrix is used, it is a non-patent document 2, This is different from Patent Document 3.
- the (channel) matrix in equation (36) is H (t)
- the precoding weight matrix in FIG. 6 is F (where the precoding matrix is a fixed one that is not changed in one received signal)
- the matrix of the phase change equation by the phase change unit is Y (t) (where Y (t) changes according to t)
- the receiving apparatus can apply the decoding methods of Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 to the received vector R (t) by obtaining H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F. .
- the coefficient generation unit 819 in FIG. 8 transmits a signal 818 related to information on the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus (information for specifying a fixed precoding matrix and a phase change pattern when the phase is changed). (Corresponding to 710 in FIG. 7) is input, and a signal 820 relating to signal processing method information is output.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives a signal 820 related to signal processing method information, and uses this signal to perform iterative detection / decoding by using the relationship of Equation (48). Will be described.
- the signal processing unit configured as shown in FIG. 8 needs to perform a processing method as shown in FIG. 10 in order to perform iterative decoding (iterative detection).
- one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s2 are decoded.
- one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s2 A log-likelihood ratio (LLR) is obtained.
- detection and decoding are performed again using the LLR. This operation is performed a plurality of times (this operation is called iterative decoding (iterative detection)).
- this operation is called iterative decoding (iterative detection)).
- the description will focus on a method for creating a log likelihood ratio (LLR) of a symbol at a specific time in one frame.
- the storage unit 815 has a baseband signal 801X (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_X in FIG. 7), a channel estimation signal group 802X (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 706_1 and 706_2 in FIG. 7), and a baseband.
- the signal 801Y (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_Y in FIG. 7) and the channel estimation signal group 802Y (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 708_1 and 708_2 in FIG. 7) are input to realize iterative decoding (iterative detection).
- H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F in the equation (48) is executed (calculated), and the calculated matrix is stored as a modified channel signal group.
- the storage unit 815 outputs the above signals as a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, and a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y when necessary.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y.
- the modulation scheme of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and the modulation signal (stream) s2 will be described as 16QAM.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first executes H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y to obtain candidate signal points corresponding to the baseband signal 801X.
- the state at that time is shown in FIG.
- ⁇ black circle
- the modulation method is 16QAM
- FIG. 11 shows an image diagram, all 256 candidate signal points are not shown.
- 4 bits transmitted by the modulation signal s1 are b0, b1, b2, b3, and the modulation signal s2.
- step b4 Assuming that the 4 bits transmitted in step b4 are b4, b5, b6, b7, there are candidate signal points corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) in FIG. Then, the squared Euclidean distance between the reception signal point 1101 (corresponding to the baseband signal 801X) and each candidate signal point is obtained. Then, each square Euclidean distance is divided by the noise variance ⁇ 2 .
- Each baseband signal and modulated signals s1 and s2 are complex signals.
- H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F is executed from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, a candidate signal point corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y is obtained, and a reception signal point (baseband signal)
- the square Euclidean distance is calculated by dividing the square Euclidean distance by the noise variance ⁇ 2 . Therefore, a value obtained by dividing the candidate signal point corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) and the received signal point squared Euclidean distance by the variance of noise is represented by E Y (b0, b1, b2 , B3, b4, b5, b6, b7).
- E X (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) + E Y (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) E (b0, b1, b2, b3) , B4, b5, b6, b7).
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 outputs E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Expression (28), Expression (29), and Expression (30), and details are shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the deinterleaver (807A) receives the log likelihood signal 806A, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304A) in FIG. 3), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving.
- the deinterleaver (807B) receives the log likelihood signal 806B as input, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304B) in FIG. 3), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving.
- Log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809A receives log-likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving as input, and calculates a log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302A in FIG.
- LLR Log-Likelihood Ratio
- the log likelihood ratio signal 810A is output.
- log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809B receives log-likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving as input, and uses a log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302B in FIG. ) And a log likelihood ratio signal 810B is output.
- LLR Log-Likelihood Ratio
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 811A receives the log-likelihood ratio signal 810A, performs decoding, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 811B receives the log-likelihood ratio signal 810B, performs decoding, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 812B after decoding.
- the interleaver (813A) receives the log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving.
- the interleave pattern of the interleaver (813A) is the same as the interleave pattern of the interleaver (304A) of FIG.
- the interleaver (813B) receives the log likelihood ratio 812B after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving. .
- the interleave pattern of the interleaver (813B) is the same as the interleave pattern of the interleaver (304B) of FIG.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 inputs a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y, an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814A, and an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814B. And Here, not the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, but the baseband signal 816X, the modified channel estimation signal group 817X, the baseband signal 816Y, and the modified channel estimation signal group 817Y. Is used because of a delay time due to iterative decoding.
- the difference between the operation at the time of iterative decoding of the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 and the operation at the time of initial detection is that the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving are used in signal processing. It is.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first obtains E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as in the initial detection.
- coefficients corresponding to Equation (11) and Equation (32) are obtained from the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving.
- E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) is corrected using the obtained coefficient, and the value is changed to E ′ (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5). , B6, b7) and output as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Formula (31), Formula (32), Formula (33), Formula (34), and Formula (35), and is shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3. .
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the operation after the deinterleaver is the same as the initial detection.
- FIG. 8 shows the configuration of the signal processing unit in the case of performing iterative detection.
- iterative detection is not necessarily an essential configuration for obtaining good reception quality, and is a component required only for iterative detection.
- the interleaver 813A or 813B may be omitted.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 does not perform repetitive detection.
- initial detection and iterative detection may be performed using QR decomposition.
- Non-Patent Document 11 linear calculation of MMSE (MinimummMean Square Error) and ZF (Zero Forcing) is performed based on H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F to perform initial detection. You may go.
- MMSE MinimummMean Square Error
- ZF Zero Forcing
- FIG. 9 shows a configuration of a signal processing unit different from that in FIG. 8, and is a signal processing unit for a modulated signal transmitted by the transmission apparatus in FIG.
- the difference from FIG. 8 is the number of soft-in / soft-out decoders.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 901 receives log likelihood ratio signals 810A and 810B as inputs, performs decoding, and performs decoding.
- a log likelihood ratio 902 is output.
- the distribution unit 903 receives the log likelihood ratio 902 after decoding as input, and performs distribution.
- the other parts are the same as in FIG.
- the precoding matrix is multiplied and the phase is changed with time.
- the operation of the receiving apparatus is described with the number of antennas being limited, but it can be similarly implemented even when the number of antennas is increased. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving apparatus does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment.
- the LDPC code has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoding method is not limited to the sum-product decoding as a soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- the decoding method is not limited to the sum-product decoding as a soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- soft-in / soft-out decoding methods such as BCJR algorithm, SOVA algorithm, Max-log-MAP algorithm, and the like. Details are described in Non-Patent Document 6.
- the single carrier method has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be performed even when multicarrier transmission is performed. Therefore, for example, spread spectrum communication system, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) system, SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Access, etc.), Multiple-Multiple Access (SC) -OFDM (SingleCurrencyMid- wise).
- OFDM Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing
- SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Access, etc.
- SC Multiple-Multiple Access
- symbols other than data symbols for example, pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), control information transmission symbols, and the like may be arranged in any manner.
- FIG. 12 shows the configuration of the transmission apparatus when the OFDM method is used.
- the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in FIG. 12
- the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201A receives the weighted signal 309A, performs OFDM scheme-related processing, and outputs a transmission signal 1202A. Similarly, the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201B receives the signal 309B after the phase change and outputs a transmission signal 1202B.
- FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration after the OFDM scheme related processing units 1201A and 1201B in FIG. 12, and the portions related to 1201A to 312A in FIG. 12 are 1301A to 1310A, and the portions related to 1201B to 312B Are 1301B to 1310B.
- the serial / parallel converter 1302A performs serial / parallel conversion on the weighted signal 1301A (corresponding to the weighted signal 309A in FIG. 12), and outputs a parallel signal 1303A.
- the rearrangement unit 1304A receives the parallel signal 1303A, performs rearrangement, and outputs a rearranged signal 1305A. The rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306A receives the rearranged signal 1305A, performs inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307A after the inverse Fourier transform.
- Radio section 1308A receives signal 1307A after inverse Fourier transform as input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs modulated signal 1309A, and modulated signal 1309A is output as a radio wave from antenna 1310A.
- the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302B performs serial / parallel conversion on the signal 1301B after weighting and phase change (corresponding to the signal 309B after phase change in FIG. 12), and outputs a parallel signal 1303B.
- Rearranger 1304B receives parallel signal 1303B as input, performs rearrangement, and outputs rearranged signal 1305B. The rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306B receives the rearranged signal 1305B, performs an inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307B after the inverse Fourier transform.
- the radio unit 1308B receives the signal 1307B after the inverse Fourier transform, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs a modulation signal 1309B, and the modulation signal 1309B is output as a radio wave from the antenna 1310B.
- phase 3 is not a transmission system using multicarriers, the phase is changed so as to be four periods as shown in FIG. 6, and the symbols after the phase change are arranged in the time axis direction.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as the OFDM scheme shown in FIG. 12
- the symbols after precoding and changing the phase are arranged in the time axis direction as shown in FIG.
- a method for each (sub) carrier is conceivable, but in the case of a multicarrier transmission method, a method of arranging using the frequency axis direction or both the frequency axis and the time axis is conceivable.
- this point will be described.
- FIG. 14 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, and the frequency axis ranges from (sub) carrier 0 to (sub) carrier 9.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 use the same frequency band at the same time (time), and
- FIG. 14A shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1, and
- FIG. Indicates a rearrangement method of symbols of the modulation signal z2. Numbers such as # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... Are sequentially assigned to the symbols of the weighted signal 1301A input to the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302A.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equivalent to one period.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, # 4n + 3 (n is an integer of 0 or more) is one cycle.
- symbols # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 0 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. Thereafter, symbols # 10 to # 19 are regularly arranged such that they are arranged at time $ 2.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 are complex signals.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are sequentially assigned to the symbols of the signal 1301B after the weighted and phase-changed input, which is input to the serial / parallel converter 1302B.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are changed in different phases, and # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equal. This is the period.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are changed in phase, and # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are equal. This is the period.
- symbols # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 0 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. Thereafter, symbols # 10 to # 19 are regularly arranged such that they are arranged at time $ 2.
- a symbol group 1402 shown in FIG. 14B is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 6 is used, and symbol # 0 is a symbol when the phase at time u in FIG. 6 is used.
- symbol # 1 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 1 in FIG. 6 is used
- symbol # 2 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 in FIG. 6 is used
- symbol # 3 is the symbol in FIG. This is a symbol when the phase at time u + 3 is used. Therefore, in symbol #x, when x mod 4 is 0 (the remainder when x is divided by 4, and thus mod: modulo), symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u in FIG. 6 is used.
- phase of modulated signal z1 shown in FIG. 14 (A) is not changed.
- the symbols can be arranged in the frequency axis direction.
- the way of arranging the symbols is not limited to the arrangement shown in FIG. Another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.
- FIG. 15 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 15A shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 15B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- 15A and 15B is different from FIG. 14 in that the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1 and the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 are different.
- FIG. 0 to # 5 are allocated from carrier 4 to carrier 9
- symbols # 6 to # 9 are allocated to carriers 0 to 3
- symbols # 10 to # 19 are allocated to each carrier according to the same rule.
- the symbol group 1502 shown in FIG. 15B is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 6 is used.
- FIG. 16 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal frequency and vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B differ from FIG. 14 in that symbols are arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. 14, whereas symbols are not arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. Is a point.
- the rearrangement method of the symbols of the modulation signal z1 and the rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 may be different.
- FIG. 17 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal axis frequency and a vertical axis time different from those in FIGS. 14 to 16, and FIG.
- the symbol rearrangement method for the signal z1 and FIG. 17B shows the symbol rearrangement method for the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged in the frequency axis direction, but in FIG. 17, symbols are arranged using both the frequency and time axes.
- FIG. 6 illustrates an example in which the phase change is switched in 4 slots, but here, an example in which switching is performed in 8 slots will be described.
- a symbol group 1702 shown in FIG. 17 is a symbol for one period when using the phase changing method (thus, eight symbols), symbol # 0 is a symbol when using the phase at time u, and symbol # 0 1 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 1, symbol # 2 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 2, and symbol # 3 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 3.
- # 4 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 4
- symbol # 5 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 5
- symbol # 6 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 6
- Symbol # 7 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 7 is used.
- symbol #x when x mod 8 is 0, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u is used, and when x mod 8 is 1, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 1
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 is used, and when x mod 8 is 3, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 3
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 4 is used, and when x mod 8 is 5, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 5
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 6 is used, and symbol when x mod 8 is 7 x is a symbol when using the phase of the time u + 7.
- the number of symbols per minute is m ⁇ n symbols (that is, there are m ⁇ n types of phases to be multiplied) n slots in the frequency axis direction (number of carriers) used to arrange symbols for one period, the time axis If the slot used in the direction is m, m> n is preferable. This is because the phase of the direct wave is more gradual in fluctuation in the time axis direction than in the frequency axis direction.
- FIG. 18 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 18B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged using both the frequency and the time axis, as in FIG. 17, but the difference from FIG. 17 is that in FIG. Whereas symbols are arranged, in FIG. 18, the time axis direction is prioritized, and then symbols are arranged in the frequency axis direction.
- a symbol group 1802 is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method is used.
- FIGS. 17 and 18 similarly to FIG. 15, even if the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 1 and the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 2 are different, the implementation can be similarly performed. An effect that reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. Further, in FIGS. 17 and 18, even if symbols are not sequentially arranged as in FIG. 16, it can be implemented in the same manner, and an effect that high reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. it can.
- FIG. 22 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 130B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from the above.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 0
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 1
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 2
- the phase of the time u + 3 is used.
- the phase change that was made shall be performed.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is used for the symbol # 4
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 5
- the phase at time u + 2 is used for # 6.
- # 7 the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- phase change as described above was performed for the symbol at time $ 1, since the cyclic shift is performed in the time axis direction, the phase change is performed as follows for the symbol groups 2201, 2202, 2203, and 2204. Will do.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 0
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 9
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 18.
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 28
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 1
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 10
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is performed for the symbol # 20
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is performed at # 29
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 2 is performed at # 2.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 12
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 21
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 30.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the feature in FIG. 22 is that, for example, when attention is paid to the symbol # 11, both the adjacent symbols (# 10 and # 12) in the frequency axis direction at the same time change the phase using a phase different from # 11.
- both the symbols (# 2 and # 20) adjacent to each other in the time axis direction of the same carrier of the symbol # 11 are changed in phase using a phase different from # 11.
- This is not limited to the # 11 symbol, and all symbols having symbols on both sides in the frequency axis direction and the time axis direction have the same characteristics as the # 11 symbol.
- the phase is effectively changed, and it is difficult to be affected by the direct wave steady state, so that there is a high possibility that the reception quality of data is improved.
- the above-mentioned characteristics are realized by providing the characteristic of cyclically shifting the symbol arrangement order.
- the phase changing unit 317 ⁇ / b> B is configured to change the phase only with respect to one output from the weighting synthesis unit 600.
- the timing for changing the phase may be executed before the precoding by the weighting synthesis unit 600, and the transmission apparatus may replace the configuration shown in FIG.
- the phase changing unit 317B may be provided in the preceding stage of the weighting synthesis unit 600.
- phase change may be performed on both of the modulation signals s1 (t) and s2 (t), and the transmission apparatus is configured as shown in FIG. 26 instead of the configuration shown in FIG.
- the phase changing unit may be provided for both outputs of the weighting synthesis unit 600.
- the phase changing unit 317A regularly changes the phase of the input signal in the same manner as the phase changing unit 317B, changes the phase of the precoded signal z1 ′ (t) from the weighting synthesis unit, The signal z1 (t) whose phase has been changed is output to the transmitter.
- phase changing unit 317A and the phase changing unit 317B change the phases as shown in FIG. (However, the following is one example, and the phase changing method is not limited to this.)
- the period which changes a phase regularly may be the same in the phase change part 317A and the phase change part 317B, and may differ.
- the timing for changing the phase may be before execution of precoding by the weighting synthesis unit, and the transmission apparatus may have the configuration shown in FIG. 27 instead of the configuration shown in FIG.
- each transmission signal includes information on each phase change pattern, for example, as control information, and the receiving apparatus obtains this control information.
- the phase change method that is, the phase change pattern, which is regularly switched by the transmission apparatus, and thereby correct demodulation (detection) can be performed.
- FIG. 28 differs from FIG. 6 in that information 2800 regarding phase change ON / OFF exists, and the phase change is performed to either z1 ′ (t) or z2 ′ (t) (at the same time). Alternatively, the phase change is applied to either z1 ′ (t) or z2 ′ (t) at the same frequency.). Therefore, since the phase change is performed to either z1 ′ (t) or z2 ′ (t), the phase change unit 317A and the phase change unit 317B in FIG. 28 perform the phase change (ON). In some cases, the phase is not changed (OFF).
- This control information related to ON / OFF is information 2800 related to phase change ON / OFF. Information 2800 regarding this phase change ON / OFF is output from the signal processing method information generation unit 314 shown in FIG.
- the phase change period is composed of the time for changing the phase only for z1 ′ (t) and the time for changing the phase only for z2 ′ (t).
- the cycle in which the phase change is performed only for z1 ′ (t) and the cycle in which the phase change is performed only for z2 ′ (t) are the same.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and z1 ′ ( The period when the phase is changed only for t) and the period when the phase is changed only for z2 ′ (t) may be different.
- z1 ′ (t) is described to change the phase in 4 cycles and then z2 ′ (t) is changed in 4 cycles.
- Z1 ′ (t) and z2 ′ (t) may be changed in any order (for example, z1 ′ (t) and z2 ′ (t) may be alternately changed).
- the phase change period is composed of the time for changing the phase only for s1 (t) and the time for changing the phase for only s2 (t).
- the cycle for changing the phase only for s1 (t) and the cycle for changing the phase for only s2 (t) are the same, but this is not restrictive, and only s1 (t) is used.
- the period for changing the phase may be different from the period for changing the phase only for s2 (t).
- phase change of (t) and the phase change of s2 (t) may be used (for example, the phase change of s1 (t) and the phase change of s2 (t) may be performed alternately, (The order may be according to a certain rule, or the order may be random.)
- the phase change of s1 (t) and the phase change of s2 (t) may be performed alternately, (The order may be according to a certain rule, or the order may be random.)
- the phase is periodically switched in the symbol, the error correction capability after error correction decoding can be improved, so that the reception quality in the LOS environment can be improved.
- the single carrier method is described as an example, that is, the case where the phase change is performed with respect to the time axis.
- OFDM Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing
- SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Access, etc.
- SC Multiple-Multiple Access
- the same can be applied to the case of using the wavelet OFDM method shown in FIG.
- the present embodiment as an explanation for performing the phase change, the case where the phase change is performed in the time t-axis direction has been described.
- phase change method described in this embodiment is considered. Can be applied to change the phase in the frequency direction. Further, the phase changing method of the present embodiment can also be applied to the phase change in the time-frequency direction as in the description of the first embodiment.
- FIGS. 6, 25, 26, and 27 show the case where the phase is changed in the time axis direction.
- time t is replaced with carrier f.
- it corresponds to changing the phase in the frequency direction, and by changing the time t to the time t and the frequency f, that is, (t) is replaced with (t, f), the phase is changed in the time-frequency block.
- symbols other than data symbols such as pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), symbols for transmitting control information, etc.
- pilot symbols preamble, unique word, etc.
- symbols for transmitting control information etc.
- each receiving device in the receiving devices that are scattered in various places as viewed from the transmitting device, each receiving device can obtain good data reception quality regardless of where the receiving devices are arranged. Disclose the method.
- FIG. 31 shows an example of a frame configuration of a part of symbols of a signal on the time-frequency axis when a multi-carrier scheme such as the OFDM scheme is used in a transmission scheme that regularly changes the phase.
- FIG. 6 shows a case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 6, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction. (By replacing time t with time t and frequency f, ie, (t) with (t, f), this corresponds to performing phase change in a block of time frequency.)
- FIG. 31 shows a frame configuration of the modulated signal z2 ′ that is an input of the phase changing unit 317B shown in FIG. 12, and one square is a symbol (however, both pre-coding and s1 and s2 are both performed). However, depending on the configuration of the precoding matrix, only one of the signals s1 and s2 may be included).
- the channel status of the most adjacent symbol in time $ 2 that is, the symbol 3103 at time $ 1 of carrier 2 and the symbol 3101 at time $ 3 is the channel state of symbol 2100 at carrier 2 It is highly correlated with channel conditions.
- the channel state of the symbol of the frequency most adjacent to carrier 2 in the frequency axis direction that is, carrier 1, symbol 3104 at time $ 2 and symbol 3104 at time $ 2
- carrier 3 is Both are highly correlated with the channel state of symbol 3100 at carrier 2 and time $ 2.
- the channel states of the symbols 3101, 3102, 3103, and 3104 have a very high correlation with the channel state of the symbol 3100.
- N types of phases are prepared as phases to be multiplied in a transmission method that regularly changes phases.
- e j0 is added to the symbol shown in FIG. 31. This is because the signal z2 ′ in FIG. 6 in this symbol is multiplied by “e j0 ” to change the phase.
- Means that That is, the values described in each symbol in FIG. 31 are the same as y (t) in equation (42) and z2 (t) y 2 (t) z2 ′ (t) described in the second embodiment. This is the value of y 2 (t).
- a high data reception quality is obtained on the receiving apparatus side by utilizing the high correlation between the channel states of symbols adjacent in the frequency axis direction and / or symbols adjacent in the time axis direction. Disclose the symbol arrangement of the symbols whose phase has been changed.
- time X and carrier Y are data.
- Symbols for transmission (hereinafter referred to as data symbols), and adjacent symbols in the time axis direction, that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are all data symbols.
- the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding corresponding to the data symbol that is, the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding in time X ⁇ carrier Y, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y, In either case, a different phase change is performed.
- Symbols for transmission (hereinafter referred to as data symbols), which are adjacent in the frequency axis direction, that is, when time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 are both data symbols, these 3
- the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding corresponding to one data symbol that is, the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding at time X ⁇ carrier Y, time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1, respectively In both cases, different phase changes are performed.
- a data symbol satisfying ⁇ condition # 1> is preferably present. Similarly, there should be data symbols that satisfy ⁇ Condition 2>.
- symbol A There is a certain symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol temporally adjacent to the symbol A is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above.
- symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although high reception quality is obtained as an SNR, the phase relationship of direct waves is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- symbol A there is a symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol adjacent to the symbol A in frequency is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above. .
- symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although it has high reception quality as an SNR, the direct wave phase relationship is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- Symbols for transmission which are adjacent in the time axis direction, that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are both data symbols, and frequency
- the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding corresponding to these five data symbols that is, , Time X ⁇ carrier Y and time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X ⁇
- Yaria Y-1 and time-based band signal of each precoded in X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 z2 ' both different phase changes are made.
- phase change will be defined from 0 radians to 2 ⁇ radians.
- the phase change applied to the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding in FIG. 6 is changed to e j ⁇ X, Y , and at time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y, the base after precoding shown in FIG.
- FIG. 31 shows an example of ⁇ Condition # 3>.
- the baseband signals z2 ′ after precoding in FIG. 6 corresponding to 3102 and the baseband signals z2 ′ after precoding in FIG. 6 corresponding to 3104 are arranged to be different from each other. Even if the reception quality of the symbol 3100 is poor on the receiving side, Shin quality to become very high, thereby ensuring high reception quality after error correction decoding.
- FIG. 32 shows an example of symbol arrangement obtained by changing the phase under this condition.
- ⁇ condition # 3> is all X and all It is established with Y.
- phase change when the phase change is applied to both the baseband signal z1 'after precoding and the baseband signal z2' after precoding, there are several methods for the phase change method. This will be described in detail.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is set to a period of 10.
- the subband carrier 1 is applied to the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is changing with time. (Although such a change is made in FIG. 32, the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after the precoding is as shown in FIG.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is constant for one period of period 10.
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is e j0
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is e j ⁇ / 9 , ... and so on.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after the precoding is performed by changing the phase of the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding with a constant value for the phase change of one cycle of the period 10. The value is changed together with the number for one cycle. (As described above, in FIG. 33, e j0 is set for the first period, and e j ⁇ / 9 ,... Are set for the second period.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is the period 10, but the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding are changed.
- the effect that the period when both of the phase changes are taken into account can be made larger than 10. As a result, there is a possibility that the reception quality of the data of the receiving apparatus is improved.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 'after precoding is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z ⁇ b> 2 ′ after precoding is a period 10.
- the subband carrier 1 is applied to the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is changing with time. (Although such a change is made in FIG. 32, the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is shown in FIG.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is performed in a period 3 different from the period 10.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is the period 10, but the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding are changed.
- the period when considering both of the phase changes is 30, and the period when considering both the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is larger than 10. The effect that it can be done can be obtained. As a result, there is a possibility that the reception quality of the data of the receiving apparatus is improved.
- One effective method 2 is that when the phase change period of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is N and the phase change period of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is M, , N and M are relatively prime, the period when considering both the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is N ⁇ M However, even if N and M are relatively prime, it is possible to increase the period.
- phase change method according to the third embodiment is an example, and is not limited to this.
- the phase change method may be performed in the frequency axis direction, or the time may be changed. Even if the phase is changed in the axial direction or the phase is changed in the time-frequency block, the reception quality of data in the receiving apparatus can be improved.
- a pilot symbol (SP (Scattered Pilot)
- a symbol for transmitting control information may be inserted between data symbols.
- SP Systemcattered Pilot
- the phase change in this case will be described in detail.
- FIG. 47 shows a frame structure on the time-frequency axis of the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol
- 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding or precoding and phase change.
- FIG. 47 shows a symbol arrangement in the case where the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding as shown in FIG. 6 (the phase is not changed in the baseband signal z1 after the precoding). ).
- FIG. 6 shows a case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 6, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- time t time t and frequency f
- (t) is replaced with (t, f)
- this corresponds to performing phase change in a time frequency block.
- the numerical value described in the symbol of the baseband signal z2 ′ indicates a phase change value.
- the symbol of the baseband signal z1 '(z1) after precoding in FIG. 47 does not change the phase, and thus no numerical value is described.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z2 'after precoding is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol
- 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding and phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal z1 'after precoding and the baseband signal z2' after precoding as shown in FIG.
- FIG. 26 shows the case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 26, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- time t By replacing time t with time t and frequency f, that is, (t) is replaced with (t, f), this corresponds to performing phase change in the block of time frequency.
- Numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal z1 ′ and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding indicate a phase change value.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding, and the baseband signal z2 after precoding.
- the phase change for ' is applied to data symbols, that is, precoded symbols. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded).
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 49 shows a frame structure on the time-frequency axis of the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- 49, 4701 is a pilot symbol
- 4702 is a data symbol
- 4901 is a null symbol
- the in-phase component I 0 of the baseband signal
- the quadrature component Q 0.
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding or precoding and phase change.
- the difference between FIG. 49 and FIG. 47 is a method of constructing symbols other than data symbols.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 49 shows a symbol arrangement when the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding as shown in FIG. 6 (the phase is not changed in the baseband signal z1 after the precoding). ).
- FIG. 6 shows a case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 6, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction. 49.
- the numerical value described in the symbol of the baseband signal z2 ′ indicates a phase change value. Note that the symbol of the baseband signal z1 '(z1) after precoding in FIG. 49 does not change the phase, so that no numerical value is described.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z2 'after precoding is performed on the data symbols, that is, the symbols subjected to precoding. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 50 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- 4701 is a pilot symbol
- 4702 is a data symbol
- 4901 is a null symbol
- the in-phase component I 0 of the baseband signal
- the quadrature component Q 0.
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding or precoding and phase change.
- the difference between FIG. 50 and FIG. 48 is a method of constructing symbols other than data symbols.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 50 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal z1 'after precoding and the baseband signal z2' after precoding as shown in FIG.
- FIG. 26 shows the case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 26, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- Numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal z1 ′ and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding indicate a phase change value.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding, and the baseband signal z2 after precoding.
- the phase change for ' is applied to data symbols, that is, precoded symbols. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded).
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 51 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration of FIGS. 47 and 49, and the components that operate in the same way as in FIG. 4 are given the same reference numerals. .
- the weighting / combining units 308A and 308B and the phase changing unit 317B operate only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates a data symbol timing.
- pilot symbol (which also serves as null symbol generation) generation unit 5101 indicates that base frame signal 5102A of the pilot symbol is used when frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (and null symbol), and 5102B is output.
- precoding and no phase rotation is not performed, for example, a method of transmitting a modulation signal from one antenna (in this case, the other antenna)
- the control information symbol 5104 includes the control information 5103, the frame,
- the configuration signal 313 is input and the frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a control information symbol
- baseband signals 5102A and 5102B of the control information symbol are output.
- FIG. 52 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration of FIGS. 48 and 50. Elements that operate in the same manner as FIGS. is doing.
- the phase changing unit 317A added to FIG. 51 operates only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates a timing that is a data symbol. Other operations are the same as those in FIG.
- FIG. 53 is a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG. Hereinafter, different points will be described.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding. When frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (or null symbol) or a control information symbol, phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is.
- the selection unit 5301 receives a plurality of baseband signals, selects a baseband signal of a symbol indicated by the frame configuration signal 313, and outputs it.
- FIG. 54 shows a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding. When frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (or null symbol) or a control information symbol, phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is.
- phase changing unit 5201 receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 5201 changes the phase of baseband signal 309A after precoding. When frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (or null symbol) or a control information symbol, phase changing section 5201 stops the phase changing operation, and the baseband signal of each symbol. Is output as is. (For interpretation, it may be considered that the phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.) In the above description, pilot symbols, control symbols, and data symbols have been described as examples.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a transmission method different from precoding, for example, transmission using one antenna transmission and a space-time block code.
- a transmission method different from precoding for example, transmission using one antenna transmission and a space-time block code.
- phase change is not performed for all symbols in the frame configuration on the time-frequency axis, and the feature of the present invention is that the phase change is applied only to the precoded signal.
- phase change method may be different depending on the modulation method used by the transmission apparatus and the coding rate of the error correction code.
- Table 1 below shows an example of a phase change method that is set according to various setting parameters set by the transmission apparatus.
- # 1 is the modulation signal s1 of the first embodiment (the modulation system baseband signal s1 set by the transmission apparatus), and # 2 is the modulation signal s2 (the modulation system baseband signal s2 set by the transmission apparatus).
- the coding rate column in Table 1 indicates the coding rate set by the error correction code for the modulation schemes # 1 and # 2.
- the phase change pattern column in Table 1 is a phase change method applied to the baseband signals z1 (z1 ′) and z2 (z2 ′) after precoding.
- the phase change pattern is defined as A, B, C, D, E,..., But this is actually information indicating a change in the degree of changing the phase.
- the change pattern as shown in the above formula (46) or formula (47) is shown.
- “ ⁇ ” is described, which means that the phase change is not performed.
- modulation schemes and coding rates shown in Table 1 are examples, and modulation schemes other than the modulation schemes shown in Table 1 (for example, 128QAM and 256QAM) and coding rates (for example, 7/8) Etc.) may be included.
- error correction codes may be set separately for s1 and s2 (in the case of Table 1, one error correction code is encoded as shown in FIG. 4). ).
- a plurality of different phase change patterns may be associated with the same modulation scheme and coding rate.
- the transmission device transmits information indicating each phase change pattern to the reception device, the reception device identifies the phase change pattern by referring to the information and Table 1, and performs demodulation and decoding. Become.
- the transmission device transmits information on the modulation scheme and the error correction scheme to the reception device. Since the phase change pattern can be known by obtaining the information, the phase change pattern information is not necessarily required in this case.
- the transmission apparatus may include an amplitude changing unit that changes the amplitude after the weighting combining unit 308A in FIGS. 3 and 4 and an amplitude changing unit that changes the amplitude after the weighting combining unit 308B.
- the amplitude may be changed for one of the baseband signals z1 (t) and z2 (t) after the precoding (in this case, the amplitude changing unit is placed after one of the weighting combining units 308A and 308B). Amplitude change may be applied to both.
- mapping method may be changed regularly by the mapping unit instead of changing the phase regularly.
- mapping method for applying the modulation method of the modulation signal s1 (t) to 16QAM and the modulation method of the modulation signal s2 (t) to 16QAM, for example, to the modulation signal s2 (t) is regularly set to 16QAM.
- 16APSK (16 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying)
- Second mapping method with a signal point arrangement different from 16QAM and 16APSK in the IQ plane ⁇ ..
- the present invention may be any combination of a method for regularly changing the phase, a method for regularly changing the mapping method, and a method for changing the amplitude, and all of them are taken into consideration. It is good also as a structure which transmits a transmission signal.
- the present embodiment can be carried out in either a single carrier system or multicarrier transmission. Therefore, for example, spread spectrum communication system, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) system, SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Access, etc.), Multiple-Multiple Access (SC) -OFDM (SingleCurrencyMid- wise). It is also possible to implement the case where the wavelet OFDM method shown in FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, as an explanation of performing phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change, the case of performing phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the time t-axis direction has been described.
- phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the t direction t is expressed as f (f: frequency ((sub) By replacing with () carrier)), the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change described in this embodiment can be applied to the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the frequency direction. Also, the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change method of the present embodiment can be applied to the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the time-frequency direction, as described in the first embodiment. It is.
- symbols other than data symbols such as pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), symbols for transmitting control information, etc.
- pilot symbols preamble, unique word, etc.
- symbols for transmitting control information etc.
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) code (not a QC-LDPC code, an LDPC code)
- the phase is regularly changed when using block codes such as concatenated codes of LDPC codes and BCH codes (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code), turbo codes using tail biting, or Duo-Binary Turbo Codes.
- block codes such as concatenated codes of LDPC codes and BCH codes (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code), turbo codes using tail biting, or Duo-Binary Turbo Codes.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameters, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- 34 for example, as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4, two blocks s1 and s2 are transmitted and the transmission apparatus has one encoder. When used, it is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. " (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 transmits two streams at the same time, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2. In order to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in s1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in s2, 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 750 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting one encoded block
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- all the blocks constituting one block are transmitted. 500 slots are required to transmit bits.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 (the “cycle” in the first to fourth embodiments).
- five phase change values may be prepared.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 slots
- phase PHASE [ Slots using 1] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [2] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [3] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [4] are 300 slots.
- the modulation method is 16QAM
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [0] is 150 slots, 150 slots using phase PHASE [1], 150 slots using phase PHASE [2], 150 slots using phase PHASE [3], 150 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 100 slots, 100 slots using phase PHASE [1], 100 slots using phase PHASE [2], 100 slots using phase PHASE [3], and 100 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3 and the transmission apparatus in FIG. 12, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 3 and 12 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 1500 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting the two encoded blocks
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- two encoded blocks are used. 1000 slots are needed to transmit all the bits that make up.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIGS. 3 and 12 (“period” in the first to fourth embodiments).
- five phase change values may be prepared.
- two phase change values are required for one slot.
- phase change set The value is referred to as a phase change set.
- five phase change sets may be prepared in order to perform a phase change of period 5).
- These five phase change values are represented as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [3], and PHASE [4].
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 600 slots
- Slots that use PHASE [1] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [4] are 600 slots Need to be. This is because, depending on the phase to be used, the influence of the phase using a large number is large, and the reception quality of data depending on this influence is obtained in the receiving apparatus.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [3] must be 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] must be 600 times
- the phase PHASE Slots that use [0] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] should be 600 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is It is necessary that the slot using the phase PHASE [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 300 times
- the number of slots using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [3] needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] needs to be 200 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 200 times
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [4] may be 200.
- the prepared phase change value (or phase change set) is PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N -2] and PHASE [N-1])
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [0] is K when transmitting all the bits that make up the two encoded blocks.
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [1] is K 1
- K i 0,1,2,..., N ⁇ 1 (i is 0 or more) N-1 or less)
- K 0,2 K 0,2
- K 1, 2 K 1, 2.
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1] are used as N phase change values (or phase change sets).
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2], Similarly to Embodiment 1, PHASE [N-1] can also change the phase by arranging symbols in the time-axis and frequency-time-axis blocks. Although described as a phase change method of period N, the same effect can be obtained even when N phase change values (or phase change sets) are randomly used. It is not necessary to use N phase change values (or phase change sets) so as to have a periodic period, but satisfying the above-described conditions is necessary for obtaining high data reception quality in the receiving apparatus. , Become important.
- a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation scheme from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change) in the first to fourth embodiments.
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream, It can be set to one of the methods to change the phase regularly, In particular, this embodiment may be implemented for a (sub) carrier group for which a method of regularly changing the phase is selected.
- phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal
- the phase change value of PHASE [i] is “X radians”, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, and FIG. 53
- e jX is multiplied by the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is performed on both precoded baseband signals, for example, when the phase change set of PHASE [i] is “X radians” and “Y radians”, FIG. 26, FIG. 27, 28, 52, and 54
- e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′
- e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a system including an apparatus that executes the transmission method and the reception method described in the above embodiment.
- the transmission method and the reception method shown in each of the above embodiments include a broadcasting station as shown in FIG. 36, a television (television) 3611, a DVD recorder 3612, an STB (Set Top Box) 3613, a computer 3620, an in-vehicle television. It is implemented in a digital broadcast system 3600 that includes various types of receivers such as 3641 and mobile phone 3630.
- the broadcast station 3601 transmits multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing video data, audio data, and the like to a predetermined transmission band using the transmission method described in each of the above embodiments.
- a signal transmitted from the broadcasting station 3601 is received by an antenna (for example, antennas 3660 and 3640) built in each receiver or connected to the receiver.
- Each receiver demodulates the signal received by the antenna using the reception method described in each of the above embodiments, and acquires multiplexed data.
- the digital broadcasting system 3600 can obtain the effects of the present invention described in the above embodiments.
- the video data included in the multiplexed data is encoded using a moving image encoding method compliant with standards such as MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) 2, MPEG4-AVC (Advanced Video Coding), VC-1, and the like.
- the audio data included in the multiplexed data includes, for example, Dolby AC (Audio Coding) -3, Dolby Digital Plus, MLP (Merdian Lossless Packing), DTS (Digital Theater Systems), DTS-HD, Linear PCM (PuldMod).
- Dolby AC Audio Coding
- MLP Mobile Lossless Packing
- DTS Digital Theater Systems
- DTS-HD Linear PCM (PuldMod).
- the audio encoding method is used.
- FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a receiver 7900 that performs the reception method described in each of the above embodiments.
- a receiver 3700 illustrated in FIG. 37 corresponds to a configuration included in the television (television) 3611, the DVD recorder 3612, the STB (Set Top Box) 3613, the computer 3620, the in-vehicle television 3641, the mobile phone 3630, and the like illustrated in FIG. To do.
- Receiver 3700 includes a tuner 3701 that converts a high-frequency signal received by antenna 3760 into a baseband signal, and a demodulator 3702 that demodulates the frequency-converted baseband signal to obtain multiplexed data.
- the receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments is implemented in the demodulator 3702, whereby the effect of the present invention described in each of the above embodiments can be obtained.
- the receiver 3700 also uses a stream input / output unit 3720 that separates video data and audio data from the multiplexed data obtained by the demodulation unit 3702, and a video decoding method corresponding to the separated video data.
- a signal processing unit 3704 that decodes data into a video signal and decodes the audio data into an audio signal using an audio decoding method corresponding to the separated audio data, and an audio output unit such as a speaker that outputs the decoded audio signal 3706 and a video display unit 3707 such as a display for displaying the decoded video signal.
- the user uses the remote controller (remote controller) 3750 to transmit information on the selected channel (selected (TV) program, selected audio broadcast) to the operation input unit 3710.
- receiver 3700 performs processing such as demodulation and error correction decoding on the signal corresponding to the selected channel in the received signal received by antenna 3760, and obtains received data.
- the receiver 3700 transmits a transmission method (such as the transmission method, modulation method, and error correction method described in the above embodiment) included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel (this is illustrated in FIGS.
- the user can view a program received by the receiver 3700 by the reception method described in each of the above embodiments.
- receiver 3700 of this embodiment can perform demodulation on demodulated data by demodulating by demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding (in some cases, a signal obtained by demodulating by demodulating unit 3702).
- the receiver 3700 may be subjected to other signal processing after the error correction decoding, and the following description is also applied to the portion where the same expression is performed.
- a recording unit (drive) 3708 for recording on a recording medium such as an optical disk or a non-volatile semiconductor memory are examples of the data obtained by processing moving images and audio.
- the optical disk is a recording medium on which information is stored and read using a laser beam, such as a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) and a BD (Blu-ray Disc).
- the magnetic disk is a recording medium that stores information by magnetizing a magnetic material using a magnetic flux, such as FD (Floppy Disk) (registered trademark) or a hard disk (Hard Disk).
- the non-volatile semiconductor memory is a recording medium composed of semiconductor elements such as a flash memory or a ferroelectric memory (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), for example, an SD card using a flash memory or a Flash SSD (Solid State Drive). ) And the like. Note that the types of recording media listed here are merely examples, and it goes without saying that recording may be performed using recording media other than the recording media described above.
- the user records and stores a program received by the receiver 3700 by the reception method described in each of the above embodiments, and data recorded at an arbitrary time after the broadcast time of the program Can be read and viewed.
- the receiver 3700 records the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding by the recording unit 3708.
- the data included in the multiplexed data A part of the data may be extracted and recorded.
- the recording unit 3708 includes the demodulating unit 3702. New multiplexed data obtained by extracting and multiplexing video data and audio data from the multiplexed data demodulated in (5) may be recorded.
- the recording unit 3708 demodulates by the demodulating unit 3702 and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing only one of the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding. May be recorded. Then, the recording unit 3708 may record the content of the data broadcasting service included in the multiplexed data described above.
- the demodulator 3702 The outflow of data, personal information, and recorded data for correcting defects (bugs) in software used to operate a television or recording device on multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding If data for correcting a software defect (bug) for preventing the image is included, the software defect of the television or the recording device may be corrected by installing the data.
- the data includes data for correcting a software defect (bug) of the receiver 3700, the data can correct the defect of the receiver 3700. Accordingly, a television set, a recording device, and a mobile phone in which the receiver 3700 is mounted can be operated more stably.
- a process of extracting and multiplexing a part of data from a plurality of data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding is, for example, a stream input / output unit 3703 Done in Specifically, the stream input / output unit 3703 converts the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 3702 into video data, audio data, data broadcasting service content, etc. according to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU (not shown).
- the data is separated into a plurality of data, and only specified data is extracted from the separated data and multiplexed to generate new multiplexed data.
- the data to be extracted from the separated data may be determined by the user, for example, or may be determined in advance for each type of recording medium.
- the receiver 3700 can extract and record only data necessary for viewing the recorded program, so that the data size of the data to be recorded can be reduced.
- the recording unit 3708 records the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and decoding error correction, but the demodulating unit 3702 demodulates and decodes error correction.
- the video data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing the video encoding is different from the video encoding method applied to the video data so that the data size or bit rate is lower than the video data. It may be converted into video data encoded by the encoding method, and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing the converted video data may be recorded.
- the moving image encoding method applied to the original video data and the moving image encoding method applied to the converted video data may conform to different standards or conform to the same standard.
- the recording unit 3708 demodulates the audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding so that the data size or bit rate is lower than that of the audio data.
- new multiplexed data obtained by converting into voice data encoded by a voice coding method different from the voice coding method applied to the voice data and multiplexing the converted voice data may be recorded.
- the processing of converting the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding into video data and audio data having different data sizes or bit rates is as follows. For example, this is performed by the stream input / output unit 3703 and the signal processing unit 3704. Specifically, in response to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU, the stream input / output unit 3703 demodulates the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding, video data, audio data, Separated into a plurality of data such as data broadcasting service content.
- the signal processing unit 3704 converts the separated video data into video data encoded by a video encoding method different from the video encoding method applied to the video data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit. And the process which converts the audio
- the stream input / output unit 3703 multiplexes the converted video data and the converted audio data, and generates new multiplexed data.
- the signal processing unit 3704 may perform conversion processing on only one of the video data and audio data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit, or perform conversion processing on both. Also good.
- the data size or bit rate of the converted video data and audio data may be determined by the user, or may be determined in advance for each type of recording medium.
- the receiver 3700 changes the data size or bit rate of video data or audio data according to the data size that can be recorded on the recording medium and the speed at which the recording unit 3708 records or reads the data. can do.
- the recording unit records or reads the data. Since the recording unit can record the program even when the speed at which the recording is performed is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 3702, the user can select an arbitrary time after the program is broadcast. It is possible to read and view the data recorded in the.
- the receiver 3700 also includes a stream output IF (Interface) 3709 that transmits the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulator 3702 to an external device via the communication medium 3730.
- stream output IF 3709 include Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), Zigbee (registered trademark), and the like.
- a wireless communication apparatus that transmits multiplexed data modulated using a wireless communication method compliant with the wireless communication standard to an external device via a wireless medium (corresponding to the communication medium 3730).
- the stream output IF 3709 is modulated using a communication method compliant with a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB (Universal Serial Bus), PLC (Power Line Communication), HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface), or the like.
- a wired communication device that transmits the multiplexed data to an external device via a wired transmission path (corresponding to the communication medium 3730) connected to the stream output IF 3709 may be used.
- the user can use multiplexed data received by the receiver 3700 by the reception method described in each of the above embodiments in an external device.
- the use of multiplexed data here means that the user views the multiplexed data in real time using an external device, records the multiplexed data with a recording unit provided in the external device, and further from the external device. Including transmitting multiplexed data to another external device.
- the receiver 3700 demodulates by the demodulator 3702, and the stream output IF 3709 outputs multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding.
- the data included in the multiplexed data Some data may be extracted and output.
- the stream output IF 3709 includes the demodulating unit 3702. Then, new multiplexed data obtained by extracting and multiplexing video data and audio data from multiplexed data obtained by demodulation and error correction decoding may be output.
- the stream output IF 3709 may output new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing only one of the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulator 3702.
- a process of extracting and multiplexing a part of data from a plurality of data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding is, for example, a stream input / output unit 3703 Done in Specifically, the stream input / output unit 3703 converts the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 3702 into video data, audio data, and data broadcasting in response to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) (not shown).
- the data is separated into a plurality of data such as service contents, and only designated data is extracted and multiplexed from the separated data to generate new multiplexed data.
- the data to be extracted from the separated data may be determined by the user, for example, or may be determined in advance for each type of the stream output IF 3709.
- the receiver 3700 can extract and output only the data required by the external device, so that the communication band consumed by the output of the multiplexed data can be reduced.
- the stream output IF 3709 outputs the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding, but demodulated by the demodulator 3702 and decoded by error correction.
- the video data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing the video encoding is different from the video encoding method applied to the video data so that the data size or bit rate is lower than the video data. Conversion into video data encoded by the conversion method, and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing the converted video data may be output.
- the moving image encoding method applied to the original video data and the moving image encoding method applied to the converted video data may conform to different standards or conform to the same standard.
- the stream output IF 3709 is demodulated by the demodulator 3702 so that the audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding has a data size or bit rate lower than that of the audio data.
- it may be converted into audio data encoded by an audio encoding method different from the audio encoding method applied to the audio data, and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing the converted audio data may be output.
- the processing of converting the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding into video data and audio data having different data sizes or bit rates is as follows. For example, this is performed by the stream input / output unit 3703 and the signal processing unit 3704. Specifically, in response to an instruction from the control unit, the stream input / output unit 3703 demodulates by the demodulation unit 3702 and decodes the error correction, thereby converting the multiplexed data obtained as video data, audio data, and data broadcasting service. It is separated into a plurality of data such as contents.
- the signal processing unit 3704 converts the separated video data into video data encoded by a video encoding method different from the video encoding method applied to the video data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit. And the process which converts the audio
- the stream input / output unit 3703 multiplexes the converted video data and the converted audio data, and generates new multiplexed data.
- the signal processing unit 3704 may perform conversion processing on only one of the video data and audio data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit, or perform conversion processing on both. Also good.
- the data size or bit rate of the converted video data and audio data may be determined by the user, or may be determined in advance for each type of stream output IF 3709.
- the receiver 3700 can change and output the bit rate of video data or audio data in accordance with the communication speed with the external device. As a result, even if the communication speed with the external device is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding, a new multiplex from the stream output IF is obtained. Therefore, the user can use the new multiplexed data in another communication apparatus.
- the receiver 3700 includes an AV (Audio and Visual) output IF (Interface) 3711 that outputs the video signal and the audio signal decoded by the signal processing unit 3704 to an external device to an external communication medium.
- AV output IF 3711 include Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), Zigbee (registered trademark), and the like.
- a wireless communication device that transmits a video signal and an audio signal modulated using a wireless communication method compliant with the wireless communication standard to an external device via a wireless medium.
- the stream output IF 3709 is a wired transmission in which a video signal and an audio signal modulated using a communication method compliant with a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB, PLC, and HDMI are connected to the stream output IF 3709. It may be a wired communication device that transmits to an external device via a path. Further, the stream output IF 3709 may be a terminal for connecting a cable that outputs the video signal and the audio signal as analog signals.
- a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB, PLC, and HDMI
- the user can use the video signal and the audio signal decoded by the signal processing unit 3704 in an external device.
- the receiver 3700 includes an operation input unit 3710 that receives an input of a user operation. Based on a control signal input to the operation input unit 3710 according to a user operation, the receiver 3700 switches power ON / OFF, switches a channel to be received, whether to display subtitles, and switches a language to be displayed. Then, various operations such as a change in volume output from the audio output unit 3706 are switched, and settings such as setting of receivable channels are changed.
- the receiver 3700 may have a function of displaying an antenna level indicating the reception quality of a signal being received by the receiver 3700.
- the antenna level refers to, for example, RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication, Received Signal Strength Indicator, received signal strength), received electric field strength, C / N (Carrier-to-noise power) of the signal received by the receiver 3700.
- RSSI Receiveived Signal Strength Indication
- Received Signal Strength Indicator received signal strength
- C / N Carrier-to-noise power
- the demodulation unit 3702 includes a reception quality measurement unit that measures RSSI, received field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, and the like of the received signal.
- the antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) is displayed on the video display unit 3707 in a format that the user can identify.
- the display format of antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of signal) is to display numerical values according to RSSI, received electric field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, etc.
- different images may be displayed according to RSSI, received electric field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, and the like.
- the receiver 3700 receives a plurality of antenna levels (signal level, signal level) obtained for each of the plurality of streams s1, s2,... Received and separated by using the reception method described in the above embodiments. (Signal indicating superiority or inferiority) may be displayed, or one antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of signal) obtained from a plurality of streams s1, s2,.
- a signal level (a signal indicating superiority or inferiority of a signal) may be indicated for each hierarchy.
- the user can grasp numerically or visually the antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) when receiving using the reception method described in the above embodiments. Can do.
- the receiver 3700 includes the audio output unit 3706, the video display unit 3707, the recording unit 3708, the stream output IF 3709, and the AV output IF 3711 has been described as an example. You don't have to have everything. If receiver 3700 has at least one of the above-described configurations, the user can use multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding. Each receiver may be provided with any combination of the above configurations according to its use. (Multiplexed data) Next, an example of the structure of multiplexed data will be described in detail. As a data structure used for broadcasting, MPEG2-transport stream (TS) is generally used, and here, MPEG2-TS will be described as an example.
- MPEG2-transport stream TS
- the data structure of the multiplexed data transmitted by the transmission method and the reception method shown in each of the above embodiments is not limited to MPEG2-TS, and any other data structure will be described in each of the above embodiments. Needless to say, the same effect can be obtained.
- FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of multiplexed data.
- the multiplexed data is an element that constitutes a program (program or an event that is a part thereof) currently provided by each service, for example, a video stream, an audio stream, a presentation graphics stream (PG). ) Or an elementary stream such as an interactive graphics stream (IG).
- a program program or an event that is a part thereof
- PG presentation graphics stream
- IG interactive graphics stream
- the program provided by the multiplexed data is a movie
- the video stream is the main video and sub video of the movie
- the audio stream is the main audio portion of the movie and the sub audio mixed with the main audio
- the presentation graphics stream Shows the subtitles of the movie.
- the main video is a normal video displayed on the screen
- the sub-video is a video displayed on a small screen in the main video (for example, video of text data showing a movie outline).
- the interactive graphics stream indicates an interactive screen created by arranging GUI components on the screen.
- Each stream included in the multiplexed data is identified by a PID that is an identifier assigned to each stream. For example, 0x1011 for video streams used for movie images, 0x1100 to 0x111F for audio streams, 0x1200 to 0x121F for presentation graphics, 0x1400 to 0x141F for interactive graphics streams, 0x1B00 to 0x1B1F are assigned to video streams used for sub-pictures, and 0x1A00 to 0x1A1F are assigned to audio streams used for sub-audio mixed with the main audio.
- FIG. 39 is a diagram schematically showing an example of how multiplexed data is multiplexed.
- a video stream 3901 composed of a plurality of video frames and an audio stream 3904 composed of a plurality of audio frames are converted into PES packet sequences 3902 and 3905, respectively, and converted into TS packets 3903 and 3906.
- the data of the presentation graphics stream 3911 and the interactive graphics 3914 are converted into PES packet sequences 3912 and 3915, respectively, and further converted into TS packets 3913 and 3916.
- the multiplexed data 3917 is configured by multiplexing these TS packets (3903, 3906, 3913, 3916) into one stream.
- FIG. 40 shows in more detail how the video stream is stored in the PES packet sequence.
- the first row in FIG. 40 shows a video frame sequence of the video stream.
- the second level shows a PES packet sequence.
- a plurality of Video Presentation Units in a video stream are divided into pictures, B pictures, and P pictures, and are stored in the payload of the PES packet.
- Each PES packet has a PES header, and a PTS (Presentation Time-Stamp) that is a display time of a picture and a DTS (Decoding Time-Stamp) that is a decoding time of a picture are stored in the PES header.
- PTS Presentation Time-Stamp
- DTS Decoding Time-Stamp
- FIG. 41 shows the format of a TS packet that is finally written into the multiplexed data.
- the TS packet is a 188-byte fixed-length packet composed of a 4-byte TS header having information such as a PID for identifying a stream and a 184-byte TS payload for storing data.
- the PES packet is divided and stored in the TS payload.
- a 4-byte TP_Extra_Header is added to a TS packet, forms a 192-byte source packet, and is written in multiplexed data.
- TP_Extra_Header information such as ATS (Arrival_Time_Stamp) is described.
- ATS indicates the transfer start time of the TS packet to the PID filter of the decoder.
- source packets are arranged in the multiplexed data, and the number incremented from the head of the multiplexed data is called SPN (source packet number).
- TS packets included in the multiplexed data include PAT (Program Association Table), PMT (Program Map Table), and PCR (Program Clock Reference) in addition to each stream such as a video stream, an audio stream, and a presentation graphics stream. and so on.
- PAT indicates what the PID of the PMT used in the multiplexed data is, and the PID of the PAT itself is registered as 0.
- the PMT has the PID of each stream such as video / audio / subtitles included in the multiplexed data and the stream attribute information (frame rate, aspect ratio, etc.) corresponding to each PID, and various descriptors related to the multiplexed data. Have.
- the descriptor includes copy control information for instructing permission / non-permission of copying of multiplexed data.
- ATC Arriv Time Clock
- STC System Time Clock
- FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the data structure of the PMT in detail.
- a PMT header describing the length of data included in the PMT is arranged at the head of the PMT.
- a plurality of descriptors related to multiplexed data are arranged.
- the copy control information and the like are described as descriptors.
- a plurality of pieces of stream information regarding each stream included in the multiplexed data are arranged.
- the stream information is composed of a stream descriptor that describes a stream type for identifying a compression codec of the stream, a stream PID, and stream attribute information (frame rate, aspect ratio, etc.).
- the multiplexed data is recorded together with the multiplexed data information file.
- FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the structure of the multiplexed data information file.
- the multiplexed data information file is management information of multiplexed data, has a one-to-one correspondence with the multiplexed data, and includes multiplexed data information, stream attribute information, and an entry map.
- the multiplexed data information includes a system rate, a reproduction start time, and a reproduction end time as shown in FIG.
- the system rate indicates a maximum transfer rate of multiplexed data to a PID filter of a system target decoder described later.
- the ATS interval included in the multiplexed data is set to be equal to or less than the system rate.
- the playback start time is the PTS of the first video frame of the multiplexed data
- the playback end time is set by adding the playback interval for one frame to the PTS of the video frame at the end of the multiplexed data.
- FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a configuration of stream attribute information included in the multiplexed data information file.
- attribute information for each stream included in the multiplexed data is registered for each PID.
- the attribute information has different information for each video stream, audio stream, presentation graphics stream, and interactive graphics stream.
- the video stream attribute information includes the compression codec used to compress the video stream, the resolution of the individual picture data constituting the video stream, the aspect ratio, and the frame rate. It has information such as how much it is.
- the audio stream attribute information includes the compression codec used to compress the audio stream, the number of channels included in the audio stream, the language supported, and the sampling frequency. With information. These pieces of information are used for initialization of the decoder before the player reproduces it.
- the stream type included in the PMT is used.
- video stream attribute information included in the multiplexed data information is used.
- the video encoding shown in each of the above embodiments for the stream type or video stream attribute information included in the PMT.
- FIG. 45 shows an example of the configuration of a video / audio output device 4500 including a receiving device 4504 that receives video and audio data or a modulated signal including data for data broadcasting transmitted from a broadcasting station (base station). Is shown. Note that the configuration of the reception device 4504 corresponds to the reception device 3700 in FIG.
- the video / audio output device 4500 includes, for example, an OS (Operating System), and a communication device 4506 for connecting to the Internet (for example, a wireless local area network (LAN) or Ethernet). Communication device).
- OS Operating System
- LAN wireless local area network
- a remote controller which may be a mobile phone or a keyboard
- either the video 4502 in the data for data broadcasting or the hypertext 4503 provided on the Internet is selected and the operation is changed. Will do.
- hypertext 4503 provided on the Internet is selected, the displayed WWW site is changed by operating the remote controller.
- the remote controller 4507 selects a channel selected (selected (TV) program, selected audio broadcast). Send information.
- IF 4505 acquires information transmitted by the remote controller, and receiving apparatus 4504 performs processing such as demodulation and error correction decoding on a signal corresponding to the selected channel, and obtains received data.
- receiving apparatus 4504 receives the control symbol information including information on the transmission method (this is as described in FIG. 5) included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel.
- the control symbol information including information on the transmission method (this is as described in FIG. 5) included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel.
- the video / audio output device 4500 may be operated using the Internet. For example, a recording (storage) reservation is made to the video / audio output device 4500 from another terminal connected to the Internet. (Therefore, the video / audio output device 4500 has a recording unit 3708 as shown in FIG. 37.)
- the channel is selected and the receiving device 4504 is selected.
- the signal corresponding to the selected channel is subjected to processing such as demodulation and error correction decoding to obtain received data.
- the receiving apparatus 4504 transmits a transmission method (transmission method, modulation method, error correction method, etc. described in the above embodiment) included in a signal corresponding to the selected channel (this is described in FIG. 5).
- a transmission method transmission method, modulation method, error correction method, etc. described in the above embodiment
- the receiving operation, the demodulation method, the error correction decoding and the like are correctly set, so that the data symbol transmitted by the broadcasting station (base station) is set.
- the included data can be obtained.
- the transmission device is equipped with a communication / broadcasting device such as a broadcasting station, a base station, an access point, a terminal, a mobile phone, and the like.
- the receiving device is equipped with a communication device such as a television, a radio, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, and a base station.
- the transmission device and the reception device in the present invention are devices having a communication function, and the devices have some interface (for example, a device for executing an application such as a television, a radio, a personal computer, and a mobile phone). For example, it may be possible to connect via USB).
- pilot symbols may be called preambles, unique words, postambles, reference symbols, scattered pilots, etc.
- symbols for control information may be arranged in any manner in the frame.
- the pilot symbol and the control information symbol are named, but any naming method may be used, and the function itself is important.
- the pilot symbol is, for example, a known symbol modulated by using PSK modulation in a transmitter / receiver (or the receiver may know the symbol transmitted by the transmitter by synchronizing the receiver). .), And the receiver uses this symbol to perform frequency synchronization, time synchronization, channel estimation (for each modulated signal) (estimation of CSI (Channel State Information)), signal detection, and the like. Become.
- control information symbol is information (for example, a modulation method, an error correction coding method used for communication, a communication information symbol) that needs to be transmitted to a communication partner in order to realize communication other than data (such as an application).
- This is a symbol for transmitting an error correction coding method coding rate, setting information in an upper layer, and the like.
- the present invention is not limited to all the embodiments, and can be implemented with various modifications.
- the case of performing as a communication device has been described.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and this communication method can also be performed as software.
- the phase changing method in the method of transmitting two modulated signals from two antennas has been described.
- the method is not limited to this, and precoding is performed on the four mapped signals and the phase is changed.
- the method is modified to generate four modulated signals and transmit from four antennas, that is, N-coded signals are precoded to generate N modulated signals, and N antennas are generated.
- the method of transmitting from can be similarly implemented as a phase changing method in which the phase is changed regularly.
- a MIMO communication system that transmits two modulated signals from two antennas and receives them by two antennas.
- (Multiple ⁇ ⁇ Input ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Single Output) communication system is also applicable.
- the receiving apparatus has a configuration without the antenna 701_Y, the radio unit 703_Y, the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_1 of the modulation signal z1, and the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_2 of the modulation signal z2 in the configuration illustrated in FIG. Even in this case, each of r1 and r2 can be estimated by executing the process shown in the first embodiment.
- a MIMO communication system that transmits two modulated signals from two antennas and receives them by two antennas.
- (Multiple ⁇ ⁇ Input ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Single Output) communication system is also applicable.
- the point that precoding and phase change are applied in the transmission apparatus is as described above.
- the receiving apparatus has a configuration without the antenna 701_Y, the radio unit 703_Y, the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_1 of the modulation signal z1, and the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_2 of the modulation signal z2 in the configuration illustrated in FIG.
- the data transmitted by the transmission device can be estimated by executing the processing shown in this specification.
- a plurality of transmitted signals can be received and decoded by one antenna in the same frequency band and at the same time (in one antenna reception, processing such as ML calculation (Max-log APP etc.) is performed.
- the signal processor 711 in FIG. 7 may perform demodulation (detection) in consideration of precoding and phase change used on the transmission side.
- precoding precoding weight
- precoding matrix precoding matrix
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement.
- a spread spectrum communication method may be used.
- the single carrier method is used, the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the receiving device is described using ML calculation, APP, Max-log APP, ZF, MMSE, etc., but as a result, the soft decision result of each bit of the data transmitted by the transmitting device (Log likelihood, log likelihood ratio) and a hard decision result (“0” or “1”) are obtained. These may be collectively referred to as detection, demodulation, detection, estimation, and separation.
- Different data may be transmitted by the streams s1 (t), s2 (t) (s1 (i), s2 (i)), or the same data may be transmitted.
- regular phase change and precoding are performed for two streams of baseband signals s1 (i) and s2 (i) (where i represents the order of time or frequency (carrier)).
- the baseband signals z1 (i) and z2 (i) after the signal processing of both generated the baseband signals z1 (i) after the signal processing of both are generated.
- the in-phase I component is I 1 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 1 (i)
- the in-phase I component of the baseband signal z2 (i) after both signal processing is I 2 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 2 ( i).
- the baseband component is replaced,
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 1 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 2 (i)
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is I 2 (i)
- the orthogonal component be Q 1 (i)
- the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 1
- the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 2 at the same time.
- the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal r1 (i) and the replaced baseband signal r2 (i) are transmitted from different antennas using the same frequency at the same time. Also good.
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 1 (i), the quadrature component is I 2 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is Q 1 (i),
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 1 (i)
- the quadrature component is I 2 (i)
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is Q 2 (i)
- Let the orthogonal component be Q 1 (i) The in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 2 (i)
- the signal processing of both of the two stream signals is performed and the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the signal after both signal processing are replaced.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and there are more than two streams. It is also possible to perform both signal processing on the signal and replace the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the signal after both signal processing.
- the quadrature component is Q 1 (i)
- the in-phase I component of the baseband signal z2 (i) 5501_2 after both signal processing is I 2 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 2 (i).
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) 5503_1 after replacement is I r1 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q r1 (i)
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) 5503_2 after replacement is I r2 ( i)
- the quadrature component is Q r2 (i)
- the quadrature component Q r1 (i) of the baseband signal r1 (i) 5503_1 after replacement and the baseband signal r2 ( i)
- the in-phase component I r2 (i) of 5503_2 and the quadrature component Q r2 (i) shall be expressed as described above.
- the baseband signal may be replaced after the signal processing.
- Both the transmitting antenna of the transmitting device and the receiving antenna of the receiving device may be configured by a plurality of antennas.
- ⁇ represents a universal symbol (universal “quantifier”)
- ⁇ represents an existence symbol (existential “quantifier”).
- the unit of phase in the complex plane for example, declination, is “radian”.
- a complex plane it can be displayed in polar form as a display of complex polar coordinates.
- the baseband signals s1, s2, z1, and z2 are complex signals.
- the complex signal is I + jQ ( j is an imaginary unit). At this time, I may be zero or Q may be zero.
- FIG. 46 shows an example of a broadcasting system using the phase changing method described in this specification.
- a video encoding unit 4601 receives video as input, performs video encoding, and outputs data 4602 after video encoding.
- the speech encoding unit 4603 receives speech as input, performs speech encoding, and outputs speech-encoded data 4604.
- the data encoding unit 4605 receives data, performs data encoding (for example, data compression), and outputs data 4606 after data encoding. These are collectively referred to as an information source encoding unit 4600.
- the transmission unit 4607 receives the data 4602 after video encoding, the data 4604 after audio encoding, and the data 4606 after data encoding as one of these data or all of these data as transmission data. Processing such as error correction coding, modulation, precoding, and phase change (for example, signal processing in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3) is performed, and transmission signals 4608_1 to 4608_N are output. The transmission signals 4608_1 to 4608_N are transmitted as radio waves by the antennas 4609_1 to 4609_N, respectively.
- the receiving unit 4612 receives the received signals 4611_1 to 4611_M received by the antennas 4610_1 to 4610_M, and performs processing such as frequency conversion, phase change, precoding decoding, log likelihood ratio calculation, error correction decoding, and the like (for example, FIG. 7).
- the reception device 4613, 4615, 4617 is output.
- the information source decoding unit 4619 receives the received data 4613, 4615, and 4617
- the video decoding unit 4614 receives the received data 4613, decodes the video, and outputs a video signal. Appears on the display.
- the voice decoding unit 4616 receives the received data 4615 as an input. Audio decoding is performed and an audio signal is output, and the audio flows from the speaker.
- the data decoding unit 4618 receives the received data 4617, performs data decoding, and outputs data information.
- the number of encoders possessed by the transmission apparatus is any number. May be. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, it is naturally possible to apply a method in which the transmission apparatus includes one encoder and distributes the output to a multicarrier transmission scheme such as the OFDM scheme.
- the radio units 310A and 310B in FIG. 4 may be replaced with the OFDM system related processing units 1301A and 1301B in FIG.
- the description of the OFDM scheme-related processing unit is as in the first embodiment.
- the formula (36) is given as an example of the precoding matrix, but a method using the following formula as a precoding matrix can be considered.
- the formula (37) and the formula (38) are set as the value of ⁇ .
- the phase change value for the period N (FIG. 3, FIG. 3) in the phase change unit in FIGS. 3, 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53. 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53, the phase change is given to only one of the baseband signals, so that the phase change value is obtained.)
- N 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (k is an integer from 0 to N-1).
- N 5, 7, 9, 11, and 15, the receiving apparatus can obtain good data reception quality.
- phase change method in the case where two modulated signals are transmitted by a plurality of antennas has been described in detail.
- the present invention is not limited to this, but a base on which mapping of three or more modulation methods is performed.
- the band signal is precoded and phase-changed, the baseband signal after precoding and phase change is subjected to predetermined processing, and transmitted from a plurality of antennas.
- a program for executing the communication method may be stored in a ROM (Read Only Memory) in advance, and the program may be operated by a CPU (Central Processor Unit).
- ROM Read Only Memory
- CPU Central Processor Unit
- a program for executing the above communication method is stored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in the storage medium is recorded in a RAM (Random Access Memory) of the computer, and the computer is operated according to the program. You may do it.
- Each configuration such as the above-described embodiments may be typically realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration) that is an integrated circuit. These may be individually made into one chip, or may be made into one chip so as to include all or part of the configurations of the respective embodiments. Here, it is referred to as LSI, but depending on the degree of integration, it may also be referred to as IC (Integrated Circuit), system LSI, super LSI, or ultra LSI. Further, the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI's, and implementation using dedicated circuitry or general purpose processors is also possible. An FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) that can be programmed after manufacturing the LSI, or a reconfigurable processor that can reconfigure the connection and setting of circuit cells inside the LSI may be used.
- LSI Large Scale Integration
- Embodiment C1 In the present embodiment, the case where the precoding matrix to be used is switched when the transmission parameter is changed in the first embodiment has been described. However, in the present embodiment, the detailed example is described above (other supplements). As described in the above), as a transmission parameter, a method of switching a precoding matrix to be used when switching between transmission of the same data and transmission of different data in the streams s1 (t) and s2 (t). A phase change method associated therewith will be described.
- FIG. 56 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission apparatus when the transmission method is switched as described above.
- 56 that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 54 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
- 56 differs from FIG. 54 in that distribution section 404 receives frame configuration signal 313 as an input. The operation of the distribution unit 404 will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 57 shows the operation of the distribution unit 404 when different data is transmitted than when the same data is transmitted.
- the encoded data is x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6,...
- the distributed data 405A is x1, x2, x3.
- the distributed data 405B is represented as x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6,.
- the distributed data 405A is represented as x1, x3, x5, x7, x9,...
- the distributed data 405B includes x2, x4, x6, x8, x10, It is expressed as ...
- the distribution unit 404 determines, based on the frame configuration signal 313 that is an input signal, whether the transmission mode transmits the same data or transmits different data.
- the distribution unit 404 when performing the same data transmission, the distribution unit 404 outputs x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6,... As data 405A after distribution.
- the data 405B after distribution is not output. Therefore, when frame configuration signal 313 indicates “same data transmission”, operation of distribution section 404 is as described above, and interleaver 304B and mapping section 306B in FIG. 56 do not operate. Then, only the baseband signal 307A, which is the output of the mapping unit 306A in FIG. 56, is valid and becomes an input signal for both the weighting synthesis units 308A and 308B.
- one feature is that the precoding matrix is switched when the transmission mode is switched between the case of transmitting the same data and the case of transmitting different data.
- the precoding matrix when transmitting the same data is as follows: It is good to express like this.
- Equation (52) a is a real number (a may be a complex number, but the phase change is given to the input baseband signal by precoding, so the circuit scale is as large as possible and does not become complicated. In view of this, it is better to use a real number.)
- a 1
- the weighting / combining units 308A and 308B output the input signal as it is without performing the weighting / combining operation. .
- the baseband signal 309A after weighted synthesis and the baseband signal 316B after weighted synthesis, which are output signals of the weighted synthesis sections 308A and 308B, are the same signal.
- the phase change unit 5201 changes the phase of the baseband signal 309A after the weighted synthesis, and the baseband signal after the phase change 5202 is output.
- the phase changing unit 317B changes the phase of the baseband signal 316B after the weighted synthesis, and the baseband signal after the phase change 309B is output.
- phase change performed by the phase change unit 5201 is e jA (t) (or e jA (f) or e jA (t, f) ) (where t is time and f is frequency) (therefore, e jA (t) (or e jA (f) or e jA (t, f) ) is a value to be multiplied by the input baseband signal.), and e jB (T) (or e jB (f) or e jB (t, f) ) (where t is time and f is frequency) (hence e jB (t) (or e jB (f) Or, e jB (t, f) ) is a value to be multiplied with the input baseband signal.) It is important that the following condition is satisfied.
- the transmission signal can reduce the influence of multipath, so that the reception quality of the data can be improved in the reception device.
- the phase change may be performed on only one of the baseband signal 309A after weighted synthesis and the baseband signal 316B after weighted synthesis.
- the baseband signal 5202 after the phase change is subjected to processing such as IFFT and frequency conversion when OFDM is used, and is transmitted from the transmission antenna.
- processing such as IFFT and frequency conversion when OFDM is used
- the baseband signal 5202 after the phase change may be considered to be the signal 1301A in FIG. 13).
- the baseband signal 309B after the phase change uses OFDM , IFFT, frequency conversion, etc. are performed and transmitted from the transmitting antenna.
- the baseband signal 309B after the phase change may be considered as the signal 1301B in FIG. 13).
- “transmit different data” is selected as the transmission mode, as shown in the first embodiment, it is expressed by any one of Expression (36), Expression (39), and Expression (50). Shall.
- the phase changing units 5201 and 317B in FIG. 56 it is important for the phase changing units 5201 and 317B in FIG. 56 to perform a phase changing method different from the case of “transmitting the same data”.
- the phase changing unit 5201 changes the phase and the phase changing unit 317B does not change the phase, or the phase changing unit 5201 does not change the phase.
- the phase change unit 317B changes the phase, for example, only one of the two phase change units changes the phase, the receiving apparatus can be used in both the LOS environment and the NLOS environment. Good data reception quality can be obtained.
- Expression (52) may be used as the precoding matrix, but Expression (36), Expression (50), or Expression ( If a precoding matrix expressed by (39) and different from Equation (52) is used, there is a possibility that the reception quality of data, particularly in the LOS environment, can be further improved in the receiving apparatus.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement. At this time, a spread spectrum communication method may be used. When the single carrier method is used, the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the phase change is not limited to data symbols, but symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols inserted in the transmission frame of the transmission signal. Therefore, the phase change is also performed. (However, the phase change may not be performed on symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols, but the phase change may be performed in order to obtain diversity gain.) (Embodiment C2) In this embodiment, a method for configuring a base station to which Embodiment C1 is applied will be described.
- FIG. 59 shows the relationship between the base station (broadcast station) and the terminal.
- Terminal P (5907) receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5905A transmitted from antenna 5906A, performs predetermined processing, and obtains received data
- Terminal P receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5905A transmitted from antenna 5906A, performs predetermined processing, and obtains received data
- Terminal Q receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5903B transmitted from antenna 5904B of base station B (5902B), performs a predetermined process, It is assumed that received data is obtained.
- the base station A (5902A) transmits from the antenna 5904A, the transmission signal 5903A transmitted from the antenna 5906A, the frequency allocation of the transmission signal 5905A, and the base station B (5902B) transmits from the antenna 5904B and the antenna 5906B.
- the frequency allocation of the transmission signal 5903B and the transmission signal 5905B is shown.
- the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents transmission power.
- the transmission signal 5903A and transmission signal 5905A transmitted by the base station A (5902A) and the transmission signal 5903B and transmission signal 5905B transmitted by the base station B (5902B) are at least the frequency band X and the frequency band.
- Y is used, the first channel data is transmitted using the frequency band X, and the second channel data is transmitted using the frequency band Y. To do.
- terminal P receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5905A transmitted from antenna 5906A, extracts frequency band X, and performs predetermined processing. To obtain data of the first channel.
- Terminal Q receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5903B transmitted from antenna 5904B of base station B (5902B). Extraction and predetermined processing are performed to obtain data of the second channel.
- base station A (5902A) and base station B (5902B) at this time will be described.
- Both base station A (5902A) and base station B (5902B) are provided with the transmission apparatus configured in FIGS. 56 and 13 as described in the embodiment C1.
- the base station A (5902A) When transmitting as shown in FIG. 60, the base station A (5902A) generates two different modulation signals (precoding and phase change) in the frequency band X as described in the embodiment C1. 2) Transmit two modulated signals from antennas 5904A and 5906A in FIG.
- base station A (5902A) operates interleaver 304A, mapping section 306A, weighting combining section 308A, and phase changing section 5201 in FIG. 56 to generate modulated signal 5202, which corresponds to modulated signal 5202.
- the transmission signal to be transmitted is transmitted from the antenna 1310A in FIG.
- base station B (5902B) operates interleaver 304A, mapping section 306A, weighting combining section 308A, and phase changing section 5201 in FIG. 56 to generate modulated signal 5202, and a transmission signal corresponding to modulated signal 5202 Is transmitted from the antenna 1310A of FIG. 13, that is, the antenna 5904B of FIG.
- the base station may individually generate the encoded data as shown in FIG. 56, but the encoding created by any of the base stations Later data may be transferred to another base station.
- one of the base stations may generate a modulated signal, and the generated modulated signal may be passed to another base station.
- a signal 5901 includes information on a transmission mode (“send the same data” or “send different data”), and the base station obtains this signal, The modulation signal generation method in each frequency band is switched.
- the signal 5901 is input from another device or network as shown in FIG. 59.
- the base station A (5902A) is the master station
- the base station B (5902B) is a signal corresponding to the signal 5901. You may make it pass.
- a precoding matrix and a phase change method suitable for the transmission method are set, and a modulated signal is generated.
- the two base stations when “same data is transmitted”, the two base stations respectively generate and transmit modulated signals. At this time, each base station generates a modulated signal for transmission from one antenna.
- the precoding matrix of Equation (52) is calculated by two base stations. It corresponds to setting.
- the phase changing method is as described in the embodiment C1, and for example, the condition of (Equation 53) may be satisfied.
- the frequency band X and the frequency band Y may be changed over time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the time may elapse and the frequency assignment as shown in FIG. 60 may be changed to the frequency assignment as shown in FIG.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement. At this time, a spread spectrum communication method may be used. When the single carrier method is used, the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the phase change is not limited to data symbols, but symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols inserted in the transmission frame of the transmission signal. Therefore, the phase change is also performed. (However, the phase change may not be performed on symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols, but the phase change may be performed in order to obtain diversity gain.)
- Embodiment C3 In this embodiment, a configuration method of a repeater to which Embodiment C1 is applied will be described. Note that the repeater may be referred to as a relay station.
- FIG. 62 shows the relationship between a base station (broadcast station), a repeater, and a terminal.
- the base station 6201 transmits a modulated signal of at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y.
- Base station 6201 transmits modulated signals from antenna 6202A and antenna 6202B, respectively. The transmission method at this time will be described later with reference to FIG.
- Repeater A (6203A) performs processing such as demodulation on received signal 6205A received by receiving antenna 6204A and received signal 6207A received by receiving antenna 6206A to obtain received data. Then, in order to transmit the received data to the terminal, transmission processing is performed to generate modulated signals 6209A and 6211A, which are transmitted from antennas 6210A and 6212A, respectively.
- repeater B (6203B) performs processing such as demodulation on reception signal 6205B received by reception antenna 6204B and reception signal 6207B received by reception antenna 6206B to obtain reception data. Then, in order to transmit the received data to the terminal, transmission processing is performed to generate modulated signals 6209B and 6211B, which are transmitted from antennas 6210B and 6212B, respectively.
- repeater B (6203B) is a master repeater and outputs control signal 6208, and repeater A (6203A) receives this signal. Note that it is not always necessary to provide a master repeater, and the base station 6201 may individually transmit control information to the repeater A (6203A) and the repeater B (6203B).
- Terminal P (5907) receives the modulated signal transmitted from repeater A (6203A) and obtains data.
- Terminal Q (5908) receives signals transmitted from repeater A (6203A) and repeater B (6203B) and obtains data.
- the terminal R (6213) receives the modulation signal transmitted from the repeater B (6203B) and obtains data.
- FIG. 63 shows the frequency allocation of the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202A and the frequency allocation of the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202B among the transmission signals transmitted by the base station.
- the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents transmission power.
- the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202A and the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202B use at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y, and the first channel is transmitted using the frequency band X. It is assumed that the data of the second channel different from the first channel is transmitted using the frequency band Y.
- the data of the first channel is transmitted in the mode of “sending different data” using the frequency band X as described in the embodiment C1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63, the modulation signal transmitted from antenna 6202A and the modulation signal transmitted from antenna 6202B include components of frequency band X. The component of the frequency band X is received by the relay A and the relay B. Therefore, as described in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment C1, the modulation signal of frequency band X is subjected to precoding (weighting synthesis) and phase change on the mapped signal. .
- the data of the second channel is transmitted by the component of the frequency band Y transmitted from the antenna 6202A of FIG.
- the component of the frequency band Y is received by the repeater A and the repeater B.
- FIG. 64 shows the frequency assignment of the modulation signal 6209A transmitted from the antenna 6210A of the relay A, the modulation signal 6211A transmitted from the antenna 6212A, and the transmission of the relay B, among the transmission signals transmitted by the relay A and the relay B.
- the frequency allocation of the modulation signal 6209B transmitted from the antenna 6210B and the modulation signal 6211B transmitted from the antenna 6212B is shown.
- the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents transmission power.
- the modulation signal 6209A transmitted from the antenna 6210A and the modulation signal 6211A transmitted from the antenna 6212A use at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y
- the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6210B uses at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y.
- the frequency band X is used to transmit data of the first channel, and the frequency It is assumed that data of the second channel is transmitted using the band Y.
- modulated signal 6209A transmitted from antenna 6210A and modulated signal 6211A transmitted from antenna 6212A include components of frequency band X.
- the component of the frequency band X is received by the terminal P.
- modulated signal 6209B transmitted from antenna 6210B and modulated signal 6211B transmitted from antenna 6212B include components of frequency band X.
- the component of the frequency band X is received by the terminal R. Therefore, as described in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment C1, the modulation signal of frequency band X is subjected to precoding (weighting synthesis) and phase change on the mapped signal. .
- the data of the second channel is obtained by using the component of the frequency band Y of the modulated signal transmitted from the antenna 6210A of the repeater A (6203A) and the antenna 6210B of the repeater B (6203B) in FIG. Will be transmitted.
- the “same data transmission” transmission mode described in the embodiment C1 is used.
- the component of the frequency band Y is received by the terminal Q.
- repeater A (6203A) and repeater B (6203B) in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 65 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving unit and the transmitting unit of the repeater, and those that operate in the same way as in FIG. 56 are given the same reference numerals.
- the reception unit 6203X receives the reception signal 6502a received by the reception antenna 6501a and the reception signal 6502b received by the reception antenna 6501b, and performs signal processing (signal separation or combination, error correction decoding) on the frequency band X component.
- the data 6204X transmitted by the base station using the frequency band X is obtained and output to the distribution unit 404, and information on the transmission method included in the control information is obtained (transmitted by the repeater). Information on the transmission method at the time of acquisition is also obtained), and the frame configuration signal 313 is output.
- the receiving unit 6203X and the subsequent units are processing units for generating a modulated signal for transmission in the frequency band X.
- the receiving unit includes not only the receiving unit of the frequency band X but also other receiving units of other frequency bands, and each receiving unit has its frequency band.
- distribution section 404 The outline of the operation of distribution section 404 is the same as the operation of the distribution section in the base station described in Embodiment C2.
- repeater A (6203A) and repeater B (6203B) When transmitting as shown in FIG. 64, repeater A (6203A) and repeater B (6203B) generate two different modulation signals in frequency band X as described in the embodiment C1 (preliminary).
- the relay A (6203A) transmits the two modulated signals from the antennas 6210A and 6212A in FIG. 62, and the relay B (6203B) transmits from the antennas 6210B and 6212B in FIG. 62, respectively.
- repeater A (6203A) is shown in FIG. 65 in processing unit 6500 related to frequency band Y corresponding to signal processing unit 6500 related to frequency band X (6500 is related to frequency band X). Although it is a signal processing unit, the frequency band Y is also provided with the same signal processing unit, and will be described with the number added in 6500.), interleaver 304A, mapping unit 306A, weighting synthesis unit 308A, phase change unit 5201 To generate a modulation signal 5202 and transmit a transmission signal corresponding to the modulation signal 5202 from the antenna 1310A in FIG. 13, that is, the antenna 6210A in FIG.
- repeater B (6203B) operates interleaver 304A, mapping unit 306A, weighting combining unit 308A, and phase changing unit 5201 in frequency band Y in FIG. 62 to generate modulated signal 5202 and generate modulated signal 5202. Is transmitted from the antenna 1310A of FIG. 13, that is, the antenna 6210B of FIG.
- FIG. 66 shows a frame configuration of a modulated signal transmitted by the base station, and the horizontal axis time and the vertical axis frequency
- information 6601 regarding the transmission method As shown in FIG. 66 (FIG. 66 shows a frame configuration of a modulated signal transmitted by the base station, and the horizontal axis time and the vertical axis frequency), information 6601 regarding the transmission method, repeater Transmits the information 6602 regarding the phase change to be applied and the data symbol 6603, and the repeater obtains the information 6601 regarding the transmission method and the information 6602 regarding the phase change applied by the repeater, thereby determining the phase change method to be applied to the transmission signal. can do. If the information 6602 regarding the phase change performed by the repeater in FIG. 66 is not included in the signal transmitted by the base station, as shown in FIG. 62, repeater B (6203B) becomes the master, and repeater A (6203A) may be instructed to change the phase.
- a precoding matrix and a phase change method suitable for the transmission method are set, and a modulated signal is generated.
- each of the two repeaters when “same data is transmitted”, each of the two repeaters generates and transmits a modulated signal. At this time, each repeater generates a modulation signal for transmission from one antenna.
- the repeater matrix of Equation (52) is calculated by two repeaters. It corresponds to setting.
- the phase changing method is as described in the embodiment C1, and for example, the condition of (Equation 53) may be satisfied.
- both the base station and the repeater transmit modulation signals from the two antennas, and transmit the same data from the two antennas. May be.
- the operations of the base station and the repeater at this time are as described in the embodiment C1.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement. At this time, a spread spectrum communication method may be used. When the single carrier method is used, the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the phase change is not limited to data symbols, but symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols inserted in the transmission frame of the transmission signal. Therefore, the phase change is also performed. (However, the phase change may not be performed on symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols, but the phase change may be performed in order to obtain diversity gain.) (Embodiment C4) In the present embodiment, a phase change method different from the phase change methods described in “Embodiment 1” and “Other supplements” will be described.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (k is an integer from 0 to N-1).
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (k is an integer from 0 to N-1).
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (k is an integer between 0 and N-1), and Z is a fixed value.
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (k is an integer between 0 and N-1), and Z is a fixed value.
- the phase change of the present embodiment is not limited to the application to the single carrier method, but can be applied to the case of multicarrier transmission. Therefore, for example, the case of using the spread spectrum communication system, the OFDM system, the SC-FDMA, the SC-OFDM system, the wavelet OFDM system shown in Non-Patent Document 7, etc. can be similarly implemented.
- the phase change is performed in the time t-axis direction as an explanation for performing the phase change.
- the phase change is performed in the frequency axis direction.
- phase change in the t direction has been described in the present embodiment by replacing t with f (f: frequency ((sub) carrier)).
- the phase change change can be applied to the phase change in the frequency direction.
- the phase changing method of the present embodiment can also be applied to the phase change in the time-frequency direction as in the description of the first embodiment.
- the phase changing method described in this embodiment satisfies the contents described in Embodiment A1
- there is a high possibility that good data quality can be obtained in the receiving apparatus.
- Expression (36) is given as an example of the precoding matrix
- Expression (50) is given as an example of the precoding matrix in the other supplements.
- the phase change value for the period N (FIG. 3, FIG. 3) in the phase change unit in FIGS. 3, 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53. 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53, the phase change is given to only one of the baseband signals, so that the phase change value is obtained.)
- PHASE [i ] (I 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (i is an integer from 0 to N-1)).
- the phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal (that is, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 12, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, FIG. 53). 3, 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53, only the baseband signal z ⁇ b> 2 ′ after precoding is subjected to phase change.
- the phase change value at this time will be described in detail.
- PHASE [0], PHASE [1], ..., n + 1 different phase change values required to realize a phase change method for switching the phase change values regularly with a period N 2n + 1.
- PHASE [i], ..., PHASE [n-1], PHASE [n] (i 0,1,2, ..., n-2, n-1, n (where i is 0 or more and n The following integer))).
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer from 0 to n).
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer from 0 to n).
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer of 0 to n), and Z is a fixed value.
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer of 0 to n), and Z is a fixed value.
- the phase change of the present embodiment is not limited to the application to the single carrier method, but can be applied to the case of multicarrier transmission. Therefore, for example, the case of using the spread spectrum communication system, the OFDM system, the SC-FDMA, the SC-OFDM system, the wavelet OFDM system shown in Non-Patent Document 7, etc. can be similarly implemented.
- the phase change is performed in the time t-axis direction as an explanation for performing the phase change.
- the phase change is performed in the frequency axis direction.
- phase change in the t direction has been described in the present embodiment by replacing t with f (f: frequency ((sub) carrier)).
- the phase change change can be applied to the phase change in the frequency direction.
- the phase changing method of the present embodiment can also be applied to the phase change in the time-frequency direction as in the description of the first embodiment.
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) code (however, an LDPC (block) that is not a QC-LDPC code)
- block codes such as concatenated codes of LDPC codes and BCH codes (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)
- block codes such as turbo codes or Duo-Binary Turbo Codes, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameters, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- 34 for example, as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4, two blocks s1 and s2 are transmitted and the transmission apparatus has one encoder. When used, it is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. " (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 transmits two streams at the same time, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2. In order to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in s1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in s2, 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 750 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting one encoded block
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- all the blocks constituting one block are transmitted. 500 slots are required to transmit bits.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5 is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) for period 5 are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIG. However, as described in the embodiment C5, there are three different phase change values. Therefore, among the five phase change values for the period 5, the same phase change value exists. (As shown in FIG. 6, when the phase is changed only to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding, in order to change the phase of the period 5, five phase change values may be prepared.
- phase change values are required for one slot. Therefore, in this case, in order to perform the phase change of the period 5, five phase change sets may be prepared).
- the five phase change values (or phase change sets) for cycle 5 are represented as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4].
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 slots
- the phase The slots using the change value P [1] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [2] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [3] are 300 slots
- the phase change value P [4 ] Need to be 300 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of the data is greatly affected by the phase change value using a large number.
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- the 500 slots described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 bits constituting one encoded block there are 100 slots using the phase change value P [0].
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [1] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [2]
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3]
- the slot using P [4] needs to be 100 slots.
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [0] is K 0
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [1] is K 1
- the number of slots that use phase change value P [2n]
- phase change method for regularly switching the phase change value described in the embodiment C5 different phase change values PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., in PHASE [n-1] and PHASE [n], the number of slots using the phase change value PHASE [0] is set to G 0 when all bits constituting one encoded block are transmitted.
- G 1 is the number of slots using the phase change value PHASE [1]
- the number of slots using the phase change value PHASE [n] is G n
- ⁇ Condition # C01> can be expressed as follows.
- ⁇ Condition # C03> The difference between K a and K b is 0 or 1, that is,
- is 0 or 1. (For ⁇ a, ⁇ b, where a, b 0,1,2, ..., 2n-1,2n (a is an integer from 0 to 2n, b is an integer from 0 to 2n), a ⁇ b) If ⁇ Condition # C03> is expressed in another way, the following conditions are satisfied.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3 and the transmission apparatus in FIG. 12, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.)
- the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 3 and 12 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 1500 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting the two encoded blocks
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- all the blocks constituting the two blocks are transmitted. 1000 slots are required to transmit bits.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5 is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) for period 5 are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIG. However, as described in the embodiment C5, there are three different phase change values. Therefore, among the five phase change values for the period 5, the same phase change value exists. (As shown in FIG. 6, when the phase is changed only to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding, in order to change the phase of the period 5, five phase change values may be prepared.
- phase change values are required for one slot. Therefore, in this case, in order to perform the phase change of the period 5, five phase change sets may be prepared).
- the five phase change values (or phase change sets) for cycle 5 are represented as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4].
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [2] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 slots
- the slot using [4] needs to be 600 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of the data is greatly affected by the phase change value using a large number.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times
- the second In order to transmit the encoded block the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [2] Is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] in the 1500 slot described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 ⁇ 2 bits constituting the two encoded blocks 300 slots, 300 slots using the phase change value P [1], 300 slots using the phase change value P [2], 300 slots using the phase change value P [3], phase
- the slot using the change value P [4] needs to be 300 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 300 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is It is preferable that the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 300 times and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 300 times.
- the number of slots that use the change value P [4] needs to be 200 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] needs to be 200 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is It is preferable that the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 200 times.
- the phase change values P [0], P [1],. .., P [2n-1], P [2n] are PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [n-1], PHASE [n] (see Embodiment C5)
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the first encoding is the number of times K 0,1 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K 2n, 1 ⁇ Condition # C06>
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the second encoding is the number of times K 0,2 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K 1,2 and the number of times the phase change value P [i] is used as K i, 2 (i 0,1,2,..., 2n-1,2n (i is an integer from 0 to 2n) )
- K 2n, 2 ⁇ Condition # C07>
- G 1, 2 and the number of times the phase change value PHASE [i] is used as G i, 2 (i 0,1,2,..., N-1, n (i is an integer from 0 to n) )
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- ⁇ condition # C05> ⁇ condition # C06> ⁇ condition # C07> instead of ⁇ condition # C05> ⁇ condition # C06> ⁇ condition # C07>, the following conditions may be satisfied.
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PN [N ⁇ 1] can be changed in phase by arranging symbols in the time axis and frequency-time axis blocks.
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) are randomly used. It is not necessary to use N phase change values (or phase change sets) so as to have a periodic period, but satisfying the above-described conditions is necessary for obtaining high data reception quality in the receiving apparatus. , Become important.
- a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system There are also modes of a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system, a MIMO transmission system with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding system, a method of transmitting only one stream, and a method of regularly changing the phase.
- the base station may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation system from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change).
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream,
- This method may be set to any one of the methods for changing the phase regularly.
- this embodiment may be implemented for a (sub) carrier group for which the method for changing the phase regularly is selected.
- phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal
- the phase change value of P [i] is “X radians”, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, and FIG. 53
- e jX is multiplied by the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is performed on both precoded baseband signals, for example, when the phase change set of P [i] is “X radians” and “Y radians”, FIG. 26, FIG. 27, 28, 52, and 54, e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′, and e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′
- e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) code (however, an LDPC (block) that is not a QC-LDPC code)
- block codes such as concatenated codes of LDPC codes and BCH codes (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)
- block codes such as turbo codes or Duo-Binary Turbo Codes are used
- a case where A1 and the embodiment C6 are generalized will be described.
- a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted will be described as an example.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameters, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- 34 for example, as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4, two blocks s1 and s2 are transmitted and the transmission apparatus has one encoder. When used, it is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. " (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 transmits two streams at the same time, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2. In order to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in s1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in s2, 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 750 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting one encoded block
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- all the blocks constituting one block are transmitted. 500 slots are required to transmit bits.
- phase change values or phase change sets prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4 are the phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly in period 5.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4] need only include at least two different phase change values (P [0] , P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4] may contain the same phase change value.
- five phase change values may be prepared.
- phase change when the phase change is performed on both of the baseband signals z1 ′ and z2 ′ after the precoding, two phase change values are required for one slot. Therefore, in this case, in order to perform the phase change of the period 5, five phase change sets may be prepared).
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 slots
- the phase The slots using the change value P [1] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [2] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [3] are 300 slots
- the phase change value P [4 ] Need to be 300 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of the data is greatly affected by the phase change value using a large number.
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- the 500 slots described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 bits constituting one encoded block there are 100 slots using the phase change value P [0].
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [1] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [2]
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3]
- the slot using P [4] needs to be 100 slots.
- phase change values P [0], P [1],..., P [N-2], P [N-1] in the phase change method for switching the phase change values regularly in the period N It shall be expressed as However, P [0], P [1],..., P [N-2], P [N-1] are assumed to be composed of at least two different phase change values.
- P [0], P [1], ..., P [N-2], P [N-1] may contain the same phase change value.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3 and the transmission apparatus in FIG. 12, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 3 and 12 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 1500 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting the two encoded blocks
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- all the blocks constituting the two blocks are transmitted. 1000 slots are required to transmit bits.
- phase change values or phase change sets prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3 for the period 5 for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus of FIG. ] shall be prepared.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4] need only include at least two different phase change values (P [0] , P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4] may contain the same phase change value. (As shown in FIG.
- phase change values may be prepared.
- the five phase change values (or phase change sets) for cycle 5 are represented as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4].
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [2] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 slots
- the slot using [4] needs to be 600 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of the data is greatly affected by the phase change value using a large number.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times
- the second In order to transmit the encoded block the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [2] Is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] in the 1500 slot described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 ⁇ 2 bits constituting the two encoded blocks 300 slots, 300 slots using the phase change value P [1], 300 slots using the phase change value P [2], 300 slots using the phase change value P [3], phase
- the slot using the change value P [4] needs to be 300 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 300 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is It is preferable that the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 300 times and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 300 times.
- the number of slots that use the change value P [4] needs to be 200 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] needs to be 200 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is It is preferable that the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 200 times.
- the phase change values in the phase change method for switching the phase change values regularly in the period N are P [0], P [1], P [2],..., P [N-2], It shall be represented as P [N-1].
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P [N-1] consist of at least two different phase change values And (P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P [N-1] may contain the same phase change value.)
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [0] is K 0
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [1] is K 1
- the phase is changed
- the phase change value P [N ⁇ 1] is the number of slots using K N-1 , ⁇ Condition # C19> K
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the first encoding is the number of times K 0,1 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K N-1,1 ⁇ Condition # C20>
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the second encoding is the number of times K 0,2 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K 1,2 and the number of times the phase change value P [i] is used as K i, 2 (i 0, 1, 2,..., N-1 (i is an integer from 0 to N-1) )
- K N-1,2 K N-1,2 , ⁇ Condition # C21>
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- the following conditions may be satisfied instead of ⁇ Condition # C19> ⁇ Condition # C20> ⁇ Condition # C21>.
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PN [N ⁇ 1] can be changed in phase by arranging symbols in the time axis and frequency-time axis blocks.
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) are randomly used. It is not necessary to use N phase change values (or phase change sets) so as to have a periodic period, but satisfying the above-described conditions is necessary for obtaining high data reception quality in the receiving apparatus. , Become important.
- a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system There are also modes of a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system, a MIMO transmission system with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding system, a method of transmitting only one stream, and a method of regularly changing the phase.
- the base station may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation scheme from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change).
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream,
- This method may be set to any one of the methods for changing the phase regularly.
- this embodiment may be implemented for a (sub) carrier group for which the method for changing the phase regularly is selected.
- phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal
- the phase change value of P [i] is “X radians”, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, and FIG. 53
- e jX is multiplied by the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is performed on both precoded baseband signals, for example, when the phase change set of P [i] is “X radians” and “Y radians”, FIG. 26, FIG. 27, 28, 52, and 54, e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′, and e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′
- e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- FIG. 67 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission apparatus according to the present embodiment. Elements that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 3 are given the same reference numerals, and hereinafter the same as described in FIG. The description of the operation element portion is omitted. 67 is different from FIG. 3 in that a baseband signal switching unit 6702 is inserted immediately after the weighting synthesis unit. Therefore, hereinafter, the description will focus on the operation around the baseband signal switching unit 6702.
- FIG. 21 shows the configuration of the weighting synthesis unit (308A, 308B).
- a region surrounded by a dotted line is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the baseband signal 307A is multiplied by w11 to generate w11 ⁇ s1 (t), and is multiplied by w21 to generate w21 ⁇ s1 (t).
- the baseband signal 307B is multiplied by w12 to generate w12 ⁇ s2 (t), and is multiplied by w22 to generate w22 ⁇ s2 (t).
- s1 (t) and s2 (t) are BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying), QPSK, 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Keying), 16 QAM, 32 QAM (32 Quadrature Amplitude). Modulation), 64QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK (16 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying) and other modulation system baseband signals.
- both weighting combining sections perform weighting using a fixed precoding matrix.
- the precoding matrix under the condition of the following expression (63) or expression (64), There is a method using formula (62).
- ⁇ is not limited to the equations (63) and (64), and other values, for example, ⁇ may be 1, and ⁇ is 0. ( ⁇ may be a real number greater than or equal to 0, and ⁇ may be an imaginary number).
- the precoding matrix is a
- the precoding matrix is not limited to equation (62),
- any one of a, b, c, and d may be “zero”.
- a is zero, b, c, d is not zero, (2) b is zero, a, c, d is not zero, (3) c is zero, a, b , D may be non-zero, (4) d may be zero, and a, b, c may be non-zero.
- two values of a, b, c, and d may be zero.
- the precoding matrix to be used may be set and changed, and the precoding matrix may be used in a fixed manner.
- Baseband signal switching section 6702 receives weighted signal 309A and weighted signal 316B as inputs, performs baseband signal switching, and outputs a replaced baseband signal 6701A and a replaced baseband signal 6701B. . Details of the replacement of the baseband signal are as described with reference to FIG.
- the replacement of the baseband signal according to the present embodiment is different from the signal for replacement of the baseband signal shown in FIG.
- replacement of baseband signals according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
- the in-phase I component I p1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the signal 309A (p1 (i)) after weighted synthesis are represented as Q p1 (i), and the signal 316B after weighted synthesis (p2 (i))
- the in-phase I component I p2 (i) and the quadrature Q component are represented as Q p2 (i).
- the in-phase I component I q1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement are represented as Q q1 (i), and the in-phase of the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement.
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are expressed as Q q2 (i). (Where i represents the order of time or frequency (carrier)) In the example of Fig. 67, i is time, but Fig. 67 is used when the OFDM method is used as shown in Fig. 12.
- i When applied, i may be a frequency (carrier), which will be described later.
- the baseband signal switching unit 6702 replaces baseband components, The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i), the quadrature component is Q p2 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q p1 (i) The modulated signal corresponding to the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 1, and the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 2 at the same time.
- the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal q1 (i) and the replaced baseband signal q2 (i) are transmitted from different antennas using the same frequency at the same time. Also good. Also, The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i), the orthogonal component is I p2 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q p2 (i) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i), the orthogonal component is I p1 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q p2 (i) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i), the orthogonal component is I p2 (i), the in-phase component
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i + v), the quadrature component is Q p2 (i + w), the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i + w), Let the orthogonal component be Q p1 (i + v) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i + v), the quadrature component is I p2 (i + w), the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i + v), Let the orthogonal component be Q p2 (i + w) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i + w), the quadrature component is I p1 (i + v), the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i +
- the in-phase I component I q1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement are represented as Q q1 (i), and the in-phase of the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement.
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are expressed as Q q2 (i).
- FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the above description.
- the in-phase I component I p1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the signal 309A (p1 (i)) after weighted synthesis are expressed as Q p1.
- This is expressed as (i)
- the in-phase I component I p2 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the weighted signal 316B (p2 (i)) are expressed as Q p2 (i).
- the in-phase I component I q1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement are represented as Q q1 (i)
- the in-phase of the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement are expressed as Q q2 (i).
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are expressed as Q q2 (i).
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are represented by Q q2 (i) as described above.
- a modulated signal corresponding to the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 312A, and a modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 312B at the same time.
- the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement and the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement are transmitted from different antennas. The same frequency is used for transmission at the same time.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives the baseband signal 6701B after replacement and information 315 regarding the signal processing method as inputs, and regularly changes and outputs the phase of the baseband signal 6701B after signal replacement. To change regularly, the phase is changed according to a predetermined phase change pattern at a predetermined cycle (for example, every n symbols (n is an integer of 1 or more) or every predetermined time). .
- a predetermined phase change pattern for example, every n symbols (n is an integer of 1 or more) or every predetermined time).
- Radio section 310B receives signal 309B after the phase change, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, and outputs transmission signal 311B.
- Transmission signal 311B is output as a radio wave from antenna 312B.
- FIG. 67 has been described in the case where there are a plurality of encoders as shown in FIG. 3. However, FIG. 67 is different from FIG. 67 in that it includes an encoder and a distributor as shown in FIG. Are used as input signals to the interleaver, and thereafter, the same operation as described above can be performed even when the configuration shown in FIG. 67 is followed.
- FIG. 5 shows an example of a frame configuration on the time axis of the transmission apparatus according to the present embodiment.
- Symbol 500_1 is a symbol for notifying the receiving apparatus of the transmission method. For example, an error correction method used for transmitting a data symbol, information on its coding rate, and a modulation method used for transmitting a data symbol The information etc. is transmitted.
- Symbol 501_1 is a symbol for estimating the channel fluctuation of modulated signal z1 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u (on the time axis), and symbol 503_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- Symbol 501_2 is a symbol for estimating channel fluctuation of modulated signal z2 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u
- symbol 503_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- the symbols at the same time are transmitted from the transmission antenna using the same (common) frequency.
- 504 # 1 and 504 # 2 indicate transmission antennas in the transmission apparatus
- 505 # 1 and 505 # 2 indicate reception antennas in the reception apparatus
- the transmission apparatus transmits the modulated signal z1 (t) to the transmission antenna 504.
- # 1 modulated signal z2 (t) is transmitted from transmitting antenna 504 # 2.
- the channel fluctuation of each transmission antenna of the transmission device and each antenna of the reception device is set to h11 (t), h12 (t), h21 (t), and h22 (t), respectively, and reception received by the reception antenna 505 # 1 of the reception device.
- the signal is r1 (t) and the received signal received by the receiving antenna 505 # 2 of the receiving device is r2 (t)
- the following relational expression is established.
- FIG. 69 is a diagram related to the weighting method (precoding method), baseband signal replacement and phase changing method in the present embodiment, and weighting synthesis section 600 includes weighting synthesis section 308A in FIG. It is a weighting synthesis unit that integrates both of 308B.
- the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
- the in-phase I component and quadrature Q component of the band signal is shown in FIG. 69, the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
- the in-phase I component and quadrature Q component of the band signal are examples of modulation schemes.
- the stream s1 (t) represents the signal with symbol number u as s1 (u), the signal with symbol number u + 1 as s1 (u + 1), and so on.
- a signal with a symbol number u is represented as s2 (u)
- a signal with a symbol number u + 1 is represented as s2 (u + 1), and so on.
- the weighting synthesis unit 600 receives the baseband signals 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)) and the information 315 related to the signal processing method in FIG. And outputs the signals 309A (p1 (t)) and 316B (p2 (t)) after weighted synthesis in FIG.
- the precoding matrix F can be expressed by the following equation.
- the relation between the in-phase I component I q2 (i) of 6701B (q2 (i)), the orthogonal Q component Q q2 (i), and p1 (t) and p2 (t) is as described above. If the phase change equation by the phase change unit is y (t), the baseband signal 309B (q2 ′ (i)) after the phase change can be expressed by the following equation (70).
- y (t) is an expression for changing the phase according to a predetermined method.
- the phase change expression at time u is expressed by, for example, Expression (71). be able to.
- phase change equation at time u + 1 can be expressed by equation (72), for example.
- phase change equation at time u + k can be expressed by equation (73).
- the regular phase change cycle is not limited to 4. If the number of periods increases, there is a possibility that the reception performance (more precisely, error correction performance) of the receiving apparatus can be improved accordingly. It's likely that you should avoid small values such as.)
- phase change examples shown in the above formulas (71) to (73) the configuration in which the phase is sequentially rotated by a predetermined phase (in the above formula, by ⁇ / 2) is shown.
- the phase may be changed randomly.
- the phase by which y (t) is multiplied in the order as shown in Expression (74) or Expression (75) may be changed according to a predetermined cycle.
- What is important in the regular change of the phase is that the phase of the modulation signal is changed regularly, and the degree of the phase to be changed is made as uniform as possible, for example, from ⁇ radians to ⁇ radians.
- the baseband signal replacement unit replaces the baseband signal described above to change the phase.
- the unit changes the phase of the input signal while regularly changing the degree of change.
- the reception quality may be greatly improved.
- the special precoding matrix depends on the phase and amplitude components of the direct wave when received. Different.
- there is a certain rule in the LOS environment If the phase of the transmission signal is regularly changed in accordance with this rule, the data reception quality is greatly improved.
- the present invention proposes a signal processing method that improves the LOS environment.
- FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of receiving apparatus 700 in the present embodiment.
- Radio section 703_X receives reception signal 702_X received by antenna 701_X, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_X.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h11 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 706_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission device receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h12 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 706_2 is output.
- Radio section 703_Y receives reception signal 702_Y received by antenna 701_Y, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_Y.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_Y as input, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h21 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 708_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission device receives baseband signal 704_Y, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h22 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 708_2 is output.
- Control information decoding section 709 receives baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, detects symbol 500_1 for notifying the transmission method of FIG. 5, and outputs a signal 710 related to information on the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus.
- the signal processing unit 711 receives the baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, the channel estimation signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, and 708_2, and the signal 710 related to the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus, performs detection and decoding, and performs reception data 712_1 and 712_2 are output.
- FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of the signal processing unit 711 in the present embodiment.
- FIG. 8 mainly includes an INNER MIMO detection unit, a soft-in / soft-out decoder, and a coefficient generation unit.
- the details of the iterative decoding method in this configuration are described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3, but the MIMO transmission methods described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 are spatial multiplexing MIMO transmissions.
- the transmission scheme in this embodiment is a scheme, it is a MIMO transmission scheme in which the phase of a signal is regularly changed with time, a precoding matrix is used, and a baseband signal is replaced.
- the point is different from Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.
- the (channel) matrix in equation (66) is H (t)
- the precoding weight matrix in FIG. 69 is F (where the precoding matrix is a fixed one that is not changed in one received signal)
- the coefficient generation unit 819 in FIG. 8 transmits a signal 818 related to information on the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus (information for specifying a fixed precoding matrix and a phase change pattern when the phase is changed). (Corresponding to 710 in FIG. 7) is input, and a signal 820 relating to signal processing method information is output.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives a signal 820 related to information on the signal processing method as input, and uses this signal to perform iterative detection / decoding. The operation will be described.
- the signal processing unit configured as shown in FIG. 8 needs to perform a processing method as shown in FIG. 10 in order to perform iterative decoding (iterative detection).
- one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s2 are decoded.
- one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s2 A log-likelihood ratio (LLR) is obtained.
- detection and decoding are performed again using the LLR. This operation is performed a plurality of times (this operation is called iterative decoding (iterative detection)).
- this operation is called iterative decoding (iterative detection)).
- the description will focus on a method for creating a log likelihood ratio (LLR) of a symbol at a specific time in one frame.
- the storage unit 815 has a baseband signal 801X (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_X in FIG. 7), a channel estimation signal group 802X (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 706_1 and 706_2 in FIG. 7), and a baseband.
- the signal 801Y (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_Y in FIG. 7) and the channel estimation signal group 802Y (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 708_1 and 708_2 in FIG. 7) are input to realize iterative decoding (iterative detection).
- the calculated matrix is stored as a modified channel signal group.
- the storage unit 815 outputs the above signals as a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, and a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y when necessary.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y.
- the modulation scheme of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and the modulation signal (stream) s2 will be described as 16QAM.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first obtains candidate signal points corresponding to the baseband signal 801X from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y. The state at that time is shown in FIG. In FIG. 11, ⁇ (black circle) is a candidate signal point on the IQ plane. Since the modulation method is 16QAM, there are 256 candidate signal points. (However, since FIG. 11 shows an image diagram, all 256 candidate signal points are not shown.) Here, 4 bits transmitted by the modulation signal s1 are b0, b1, b2, b3, and the modulation signal s2.
- step b4 Assuming that the 4 bits transmitted in step b4 are b4, b5, b6, b7, there are candidate signal points corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) in FIG. Then, the squared Euclidean distance between the reception signal point 1101 (corresponding to the baseband signal 801X) and each candidate signal point is obtained. Then, each square Euclidean distance is divided by the noise variance ⁇ 2 .
- Each baseband signal and modulated signals s1 and s2 are complex signals.
- candidate signal points corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y are obtained from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, and the square Euclidean distance from the reception signal point (corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y) is obtained.
- the square Euclidean distance is divided by the noise variance ⁇ 2 . Therefore, a value obtained by dividing the candidate signal point corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) and the received signal point squared Euclidean distance by the variance of noise is represented by E Y (b0, b1, b2 , B3, b4, b5, b6, b7).
- E X (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) + E Y (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) E (b0, b1, b2, b3) , B4, b5, b6, b7).
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 outputs E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Expression (28), Expression (29), and Expression (30), and details are shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the deinterleaver (807A) receives the log likelihood signal 806A, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304A in FIG. 67)), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving.
- the deinterleaver (807B) receives the log likelihood signal 806B as input, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304B) in FIG. 67), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving.
- Log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809A receives log-likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving as input, and calculates a log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302A in FIG.
- LLR Log-Likelihood Ratio
- the log likelihood ratio signal 810A is output.
- log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809B receives log-likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving as input, and uses the log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302B in FIG. ) And a log likelihood ratio signal 810B is output.
- LLR Log-Likelihood Ratio
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 811A receives the log-likelihood ratio signal 810A, performs decoding, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 811B receives the log-likelihood ratio signal 810B, performs decoding, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 812B after decoding.
- the interleaver (813A) receives the log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving.
- the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (813A) is the same as the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (304A) of FIG.
- the interleaver (813B) receives the log likelihood ratio 812B after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving. .
- the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (813B) is the same as the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (304B) of FIG.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 inputs a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y, an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814A, and an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814B. And Here, not the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, but the baseband signal 816X, the modified channel estimation signal group 817X, the baseband signal 816Y, and the modified channel estimation signal group 817Y. Is used because of a delay time due to iterative decoding.
- the difference between the operation at the time of iterative decoding of the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 and the operation at the time of initial detection is that the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving are used in signal processing. It is.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first obtains E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as in the initial detection.
- coefficients corresponding to Equation (11) and Equation (32) are obtained from the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 914B after interleaving.
- E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) is corrected using the obtained coefficient, and the value is changed to E ′ (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5). , B6, b7) and output as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Expression (31), Expression (Expression 32), Expression (33), Expression (34), and Expression (35), and is shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3. Yes.
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the operation after the deinterleaver is the same as the initial detection.
- FIG. 8 shows the configuration of the signal processing unit in the case of performing iterative detection.
- iterative detection is not necessarily an essential configuration for obtaining good reception quality, and is a component required only for iterative detection.
- the interleaver 813A or 813B may be omitted.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 does not perform repetitive detection.
- initial detection and iterative detection may be performed using QR decomposition.
- linear detection of MMSE (MinimummMean Square Error) and ZF (Zero Forcing) may be performed to perform initial detection.
- FIG. 9 shows a configuration of a signal processing unit different from that in FIG. 8, and is a signal processing unit for a modulated signal transmitted from a transmission device to which the encoder and distribution unit of FIG.
- the difference from FIG. 8 is the number of soft-in / soft-out decoders.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 901 receives log likelihood ratio signals 810A and 810B as inputs, performs decoding, and performs decoding.
- a log likelihood ratio 902 is output.
- the distribution unit 903 receives the log likelihood ratio 902 after decoding as input, and performs distribution.
- the other parts are the same as in FIG.
- the transmission apparatus of the MIMO transmission system transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas as in the present embodiment
- the precoding matrix is multiplied and the phase is changed with time.
- the operation of the receiving apparatus is described with the number of antennas being limited, but it can be similarly implemented even when the number of antennas is increased. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving apparatus does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment.
- the coding is not limited to the LDPC code, and the decoding method is not limited to the example of the sum-product decoding as the soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- the decoding method is not limited to the example of the sum-product decoding as the soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- There are other soft-in / soft-out decoding methods such as BCJR algorithm, SOVA algorithm, Max-log-MAP algorithm, and the like. Details are described in Non-Patent Document 6.
- the single carrier method has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be implemented even when multicarrier transmission is performed. Therefore, for example, the case of using the spread spectrum communication system, the OFDM system, the SC-FDMA, the SC-OFDM system, the wavelet OFDM system shown in Non-Patent Document 7, etc. can be similarly implemented.
- symbols other than data symbols for example, pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), control information transmission symbols, and the like may be arranged in any manner.
- FIG. 70 shows the configuration of the transmission apparatus when the OFDM method is used. 70 that operate in the same manner as in FIGS. 3, 12, and 67 are given the same reference numerals.
- the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201A receives the weighted signal 309A, performs OFDM scheme-related processing, and outputs a transmission signal 1202A. Similarly, the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201B receives the signal 309B after the phase change and outputs a transmission signal 1202B.
- FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration after the OFDM scheme-related processing units 1201A and 1201B in FIG. 70.
- the portions related to 1201A to 312A in FIG. 70 are 1301A to 1310A, and the portions related to 1201B to 312B. Are 1301B to 1310B.
- the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302A performs serial / parallel conversion on the baseband signal 1301A after replacement (corresponding to the baseband signal 6701A after replacement in FIG. 70), and outputs a parallel signal 1303A.
- the rearrangement unit 1304A receives the parallel signal 1303A, performs rearrangement, and outputs a rearranged signal 1305A. The rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306A receives the rearranged signal 1305A, performs inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307A after the inverse Fourier transform.
- Radio section 1308A receives signal 1307A after inverse Fourier transform as input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs modulated signal 1309A, and modulated signal 1309A is output as a radio wave from antenna 1310A.
- the serial / parallel converter 1302B performs serial / parallel conversion on the signal 1301B after the phase change (corresponding to the signal 309B after the phase change in FIG. 12), and outputs a parallel signal 1303B.
- Rearranger 1304B receives parallel signal 1303B as input, performs rearrangement, and outputs rearranged signal 1305B. The rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306B receives the rearranged signal 1305B, performs an inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307B after the inverse Fourier transform.
- the radio unit 1308B receives the signal 1307B after the inverse Fourier transform, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs a modulation signal 1309B, and the modulation signal 1309B is output as a radio wave from the antenna 1310B.
- the phase 67 is not a transmission system using multicarriers, and therefore, the phase is changed so as to be four periods as shown in FIG. 69, and the symbols after the phase change are arranged in the time axis direction.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as the OFDM scheme as shown in FIG. 70 is used, naturally, as shown in FIG.
- a method of arranging using the frequency axis direction or both the frequency axis and the time axis is conceivable. Hereinafter, this point will be described.
- FIG. 14 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, and the frequency axis ranges from (sub) carrier 0 to (sub) carrier 9.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 use the same frequency band at the same time (time), and
- FIG. 14A shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1, and
- FIG. Indicates a rearrangement method of symbols of the modulation signal z2. Numbers such as # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... Are sequentially assigned to the symbols of the baseband signal 1301A after replacement which are input to the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302A.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equivalent to one period.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, # 4n + 3 (n is an integer of 0 or more) is one cycle.
- symbols # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 0 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. Thereafter, symbols # 10 to # 19 are regularly arranged such that they are arranged at time $ 2.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 are complex signals.
- numbers # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are sequentially assigned to symbols of the signal 1301B after the phase input to the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302B is changed.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are changed in different phases, and # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equal.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are changed in phase, and # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are equal. This is the period.
- symbols # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 0 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. Thereafter, symbols # 10 to # 19 are regularly arranged such that they are arranged at time $ 2.
- a symbol group 1402 shown in FIG. 14B is a symbol for one cycle when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 69 is used, and symbol # 0 is a symbol when using the phase at time u in FIG.
- Symbol # 1 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 1 in FIG. 69 is used
- symbol # 2 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 in FIG. 69 is used
- symbol # 3 is the symbol in FIG. This is a symbol when the phase at time u + 3 is used. Therefore, in symbol #x, when x mod 4 (the remainder when x is divided by 4, and hence mod: modulo) is 0, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u in FIG. 69 is used.
- phase of modulated signal z1 shown in FIG. 14 (A) is not changed.
- the symbols can be arranged in the frequency axis direction.
- the way of arranging the symbols is not limited to the arrangement shown in FIG. Another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.
- FIG. 15 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 15A shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 15B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- 15A and 15B is different from FIG. 14 in that the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1 and the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 are different.
- FIG. 0 to # 5 are allocated from carrier 4 to carrier 9
- symbols # 6 to # 9 are allocated to carriers 0 to 3
- symbols # 10 to # 19 are allocated to each carrier according to the same rule.
- the symbol group 1502 shown in FIG. 15B is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 6 is used.
- FIG. 16 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal frequency and vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B differ from FIG. 14 in that symbols are arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. 14, whereas symbols are not arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. Is a point.
- the rearrangement method of the symbols of the modulation signal z1 and the rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 may be different.
- FIG. 17 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal axis frequency and a vertical axis time different from those in FIGS. 14 to 16, and FIG.
- the symbol rearrangement method for the signal z1 and FIG. 17B shows the symbol rearrangement method for the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged in the frequency axis direction, but in FIG. 17, symbols are arranged using both the frequency and time axes.
- a symbol group 1702 shown in FIG. 17 is a symbol for one period when using the phase changing method (thus, eight symbols), symbol # 0 is a symbol when using the phase at time u, and symbol # 0 1 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 1, symbol # 2 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 2, and symbol # 3 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 3.
- # 4 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 4
- symbol # 5 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 5
- symbol # 6 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 6
- Symbol # 7 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 7 is used.
- symbol #x when x mod 8 is 0, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u is used, and when x mod 8 is 1, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 1
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 is used, and when x mod 8 is 3, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 3
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 4 is used, and when x mod 8 is 5, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 5
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 6 is used, and symbol when x mod 8 is 7 x is a symbol when using the phase of the time u + 7.
- the number of symbols per minute is m ⁇ n symbols (that is, there are m ⁇ n types of phases to be multiplied) n slots in the frequency axis direction (number of carriers) used to arrange symbols for one period, the time axis If the slot used in the direction is m, m> n is preferable. This is because the phase of the direct wave is more gradual in fluctuation in the time axis direction than in the frequency axis direction.
- FIG. 18 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 18B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged using both the frequency and the time axis, as in FIG. 17, but the difference from FIG. 17 is that in FIG. Whereas symbols are arranged, in FIG. 18, the time axis direction is prioritized, and then symbols are arranged in the frequency axis direction.
- a symbol group 1802 is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method is used.
- FIGS. 17 and 18 similarly to FIG. 15, even if the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 1 and the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 2 are different, the implementation can be similarly performed. An effect that reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. Further, in FIGS. 17 and 18, even if symbols are not sequentially arranged as in FIG. 16, it can be implemented in the same manner, and an effect that high reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. it can.
- FIG. 22 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 130B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from the above.
- the phase at times u to u + 3 in FIG. 69 is changed.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is used for the symbol # 4
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 5
- the phase at time u + 2 is used for # 6.
- # 7 the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- phase change as described above was performed for the symbol at time $ 1, since the cyclic shift is performed in the time axis direction, the phase change is performed as follows for the symbol groups 2201, 2202, 2203, and 2204. Will do.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 0
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 9
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 18.
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 28
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 1
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 10
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is performed for the symbol # 20
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is performed at # 29
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 2 is performed at # 2.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 12
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 21
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 30.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the feature in FIG. 22 is that, for example, when attention is paid to the symbol # 11, both the adjacent symbols (# 10 and # 12) in the frequency axis direction at the same time change the phase using a phase different from # 11.
- both the symbols (# 2 and # 20) adjacent to each other in the time axis direction of the same carrier of the symbol # 11 are changed in phase using a phase different from # 11.
- This is not limited to the # 11 symbol, and all symbols having symbols on both sides in the frequency axis direction and the time axis direction have the same characteristics as the # 11 symbol.
- the phase is effectively changed, and it is difficult to be affected by the direct wave steady state, so that there is a high possibility that the reception quality of data is improved.
- the above-mentioned characteristics are realized by providing the characteristic of cyclically shifting the symbol arrangement order.
- the phase changing unit 317A receives the replaced baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)), and the phase changing unit 317B receives the replaced baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)). It will be.
- FIG. 31 shows an example of a frame configuration of a part of symbols of a signal on the time-frequency axis when a multi-carrier scheme such as the OFDM scheme is used in a transmission scheme that regularly changes the phase.
- FIG. 31 shows a frame configuration of the modulated signal z2 ′ corresponding to the baseband signal after replacement, which is an input of the phase changing unit 317B shown in FIG. 67, and one square is a symbol (however, precoding is performed). Therefore, it is normal that both signals of s1 and s2 are included, but depending on the configuration of the precoding matrix, there may be only one signal of s1 and s2.
- the channel status of the most adjacent symbol in time $ 2 that is, the symbol 3103 at time $ 1 of carrier 2 and the symbol 3101 at time $ 3 is the channel state of symbol 2100 at carrier 2 It is highly correlated with channel conditions.
- the channel state of the symbol of the frequency most adjacent to carrier 2 in the frequency axis direction that is, carrier 1, symbol 3104 at time $ 2 and symbol 3104 at time $ 2
- carrier 3 is Both are highly correlated with the channel state of symbol 3100 at carrier 2 and time $ 2.
- the channel states of the symbols 3101, 3102, 3103, and 3104 have a very high correlation with the channel state of the symbol 3100.
- N types of phases are prepared as phases to be multiplied in a transmission method that regularly changes phases.
- e j0 is added to the symbol shown in FIG. 31. This is because the signal z2 ′ in FIG. 6 in this symbol is multiplied by “e j0 ” to change the phase.
- a high data reception quality is obtained on the receiving apparatus side by utilizing the high correlation between the channel states of symbols adjacent in the frequency axis direction and / or symbols adjacent in the time axis direction. Disclose the symbol arrangement of the symbols whose phase is changed.
- the conditions # D1-1 and # D1-2 are conceivable as conditions for obtaining high data reception quality on the receiving side.
- Symbols which are adjacent in the time axis direction, that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are all data symbols, and these three data symbols.
- data symbols which are adjacent in the time axis direction, that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are all data symbols, and these three data symbols.
- the baseband signal q2 after replacement corresponding to, that is, the baseband signal q2 after replacement in time X ⁇ carrier Y, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y, and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y, all have different phase changes. Done.
- time X and carrier Y are used for data transmission. If the symbols adjacent to each other in the frequency axis direction, ie, time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 are both data symbols, these three data
- the baseband signal q2 after replacement corresponding to the symbol that is, the baseband signal q2 after replacement at time X ⁇ carrier Y, time X ⁇ carrier Y-1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1, all have different phase changes. Is done.
- symbol A There is a certain symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol temporally adjacent to the symbol A is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above.
- symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although high reception quality is obtained as an SNR, the phase relationship of direct waves is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- symbol A there is a certain symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol adjacent to symbol A in terms of frequency is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above. .
- symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although it has high reception quality as an SNR, the direct wave phase relationship is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- time X and carrier Y are used for data transmission.
- Symbols hereinafter referred to as data symbols
- adjacent symbols in the time axis direction that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are both data symbols, and in the frequency axis direction.
- the time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and the time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 are both data symbols
- the baseband signal q2 after replacement corresponding to these five data symbols ie, the time X ⁇ Carrier Y and time X-1 Carrier Y and time X + 1 Carrier Y and time X Carrier Y-1
- the baseband signal q2 after each replacement in beauty time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1, either a different phase changes are made.
- phase change will be defined from 0 radians to 2 ⁇ radians.
- the phase change applied to the baseband signal q2 after replacement shown in FIG. 69 is changed to e j ⁇ X, Y.
- ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 ⁇ ⁇ X ⁇ 1, Y + 1 are In ⁇ Condition # D1-3>, ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X ⁇ 1, Y and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X + 1, Y and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X-1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X + 1, Y and ⁇ X-1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y-1 and ⁇ X-1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X + 1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X + 1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 and ⁇ X
- FIG. 31 shows an example of ⁇ Condition # D1-3>.
- the baseband signals q2 and q3104 shown in FIG. 69 corresponding to the changed baseband signals q2 and 3104 are arranged so that the phases multiplied by the changed baseband signals q2 and q are different from each other. Even if the reception quality is poor, the reception quality of the adjacent symbols will be very high. The high reception quality after positive decoding can be ensured.
- FIG. 32 shows an example of symbol arrangement obtained by changing the phase under this condition.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is set to a period 10.
- the (sub) carrier 1 is replaced with a baseband after replacement.
- the phase change applied to the signal q2 is changed with time. (In FIG. 32, such a change is made, but the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement is as shown in FIG.
- the value for changing the phase for one period of period 10 is constant.
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement is ej0 , and the next (replacement)
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after the replacement is e j ⁇ / 9 , and so on.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after the replacement is performed by changing the phase of the baseband signal q2 after the precoding after changing the phase, with the value of the phase change for one period of 10 being constant. The value is changed together with the number for one cycle.
- e j0 is set for the first period
- e j ⁇ / 9 is set for the second period.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is the cycle 10, but both the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement are considered.
- the effect that the period can be made larger than 10 can be obtained. As a result, there is a possibility that the reception quality of the data of the receiving apparatus is improved.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is set to a period 10.
- the (sub) carrier 1 is replaced with a baseband after replacement.
- the phase change applied to the signal q2 is changed with time. (In FIG. 32, such a change is made, but the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement is as shown in FIG.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q ⁇ b> 2 after replacement is performed in a period 3 different from the period 10.
- the symbol “e j0 ” is attached to the symbol illustrated in FIG. 30, and this is obtained by multiplying the baseband signal q 1 after replacement in this symbol by “e j0 ”. It means that the phase has been changed.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is the cycle 10, but both the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement are considered.
- the period becomes 30 and the effect is obtained that the period when the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement are taken into consideration can be made larger than 10. it can.
- phase change method described above is an example, and is not limited to this. Phase change is performed in the frequency axis direction, phase change is performed in the time axis direction, and phase change is performed in the time-frequency block. However, similarly, the reception quality of data in the receiving apparatus can be improved.
- a pilot symbol (SP (Scattered Pilot)
- a symbol for transmitting control information may be inserted between data symbols.
- SP Systemcattered Pilot
- the phase change in this case will be described in detail.
- FIG. 47 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol and 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a baseband signal after replacement or a symbol subjected to phase change with the baseband signal after replacement.
- FIG. 47 shows a symbol arrangement in the case where the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement as shown in FIG. 69 (the phase change is not performed on the baseband signal q1 after replacement).
- FIG. 69 shows the case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 69, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- time t time t and frequency f
- the base after replacement in FIG. the numerical values set forth in a symbol of the band signals q 2 shows a phase change value.
- the symbol of the baseband signal q1 (z1) after the replacement in FIG. 47 does not change the phase, and thus no numerical value is described.
- phase change for the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed on the data symbols, that is, the symbols subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol
- 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding and phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement. Therefore, the numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement in FIG. 48 indicate phase change values.
- phase change for the baseband signal q1 after replacement is performed on data symbols, that is, symbols that have been subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement.
- the phase change with respect to the band signal q2 is performed on data symbols, that is, symbols on which precoding and baseband signal replacement have been performed. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded).
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 49 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 49 shows a symbol arrangement in the case where the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement as shown in FIG. 69 (the phase change is not performed on the baseband signal q1 after replacement).
- FIG. 69 the case where the phase is changed in the time axis direction is shown, but in FIG. 6, considering that the time t is replaced with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction. 49.
- time t time t and frequency f
- (t) is replaced with (t, f)
- this corresponds to changing the phase with a block of time frequency.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 50 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- the difference between FIG. 50 and FIG. 48 is a method of constructing symbols other than data symbols.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 50 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement. Therefore, the numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement in FIG. 50 indicate phase change values.
- phase change for the baseband signal q1 after replacement is performed on the data symbols, that is, the symbols subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement, and the baseband after replacement.
- the phase change with respect to the signal q2 is performed on data symbols, that is, on symbols subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded).
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 51 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration of FIGS. 47 and 49, and the components that operate in the same way as in FIG. 4 are given the same reference numerals. . 51 does not illustrate the baseband signal switching unit illustrated in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 51, the baseband signal switching unit is provided between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIG. 67 and FIG. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- the weighting / combining units 308A and 308B, the phase changing unit 317B, and the baseband signal exchanging unit operate only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates a timing that is a data symbol.
- pilot symbol (which also serves as null symbol generation) generation unit 5101 indicates that base frame signal 5102A of the pilot symbol is used when frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (and null symbol), and 5102B is output.
- the control information symbol 5104 includes control information 5103,
- the frame configuration signal 313 is input and indicates that the frame configuration signal 313 is a control information symbol
- baseband signals 5102A and 5102B of the control information symbol are output.
- FIG. 52 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration of FIGS. 48 and 50. Elements that operate in the same manner as FIGS. is doing.
- the phase changing unit 317A added to FIG. 51 operates only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates a timing that is a data symbol.
- Other operations are the same as those in FIG. 52 does not show the baseband signal switching unit shown in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 52, the baseband signal switching unit is located between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIGS. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- FIG. 53 is a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG. 53 does not illustrate the baseband signal switching unit illustrated in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 53, the baseband signal switching unit is provided between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIGS. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. When frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding.
- phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is. (For interpretation, it may be considered that the phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.)
- the selection unit 5301 receives a plurality of baseband signals, selects a baseband signal of a symbol indicated by the frame configuration signal 313, and outputs it.
- FIG. 54 shows a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG. 54 does not illustrate the baseband signal switching unit illustrated in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 54, the baseband signal switching unit is provided between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIG. 67 and FIG. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. When frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding.
- phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is. (For interpretation, it may be considered that the phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.)
- the phase changing unit 5201 receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 5201 changes the phase of baseband signal 309A after precoding.
- phase changing section 5201 stops the phase changing operation, and the baseband signal of each symbol.
- phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.
- pilot symbols, control symbols, and data symbols have been described as examples.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a transmission method different from precoding, for example, transmission using one antenna transmission and a space-time block code.
- the symbol is transmitted using a scheme, etc., it is important not to change the phase, and conversely, for a symbol subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement, Performing the phase change is important in the present invention.
- phase change is not performed for all symbols in the frame structure on the time-frequency axis, and the feature of the present invention is that the phase change is applied only to the signal that has undergone precoding and baseband signal replacement.
- Non-Patent Document 12 to Non-Patent Document 15 a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) code (which may be an LDPC code, not a QC-LDPC code)
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) code (which may be an LDPC code, not a QC-LDPC code)
- a method of regularly changing the phase when using a block code such as a concatenated code of LDPC code and BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code), turbo code using tail biting, or Duo-Binary TurboCode.
- BCH code Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code
- turbo code using tail biting or Duo-Binary TurboCode.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameter, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- FIG. 34 applies, for example, the encoder and distribution unit shown in FIG. 4 to the transmission apparatuses in FIGS. 69 and 70, transmits two streams s1 and s2, and the transmission apparatus has one transmission apparatus.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a change in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one post-encoding block when a block code is used when the encoder is included. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the above-described transmitting apparatus transmits two streams simultaneously, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2, so s1 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in step S1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in step s2.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 750 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting one encoded block
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- all the blocks constituting one block are transmitted. 500 slots are required to transmit bits.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission device described above.
- five phase change values may be prepared in order to change the phase of cycle 5.
- the base after replacement is changed.
- the phase change is performed on both the band signal q1 and the baseband signal q2 after replacement, two phase change values are required for one slot, and these two phase change values are called a phase change set. Therefore, in this case, in order to change the phase of the period 5, it is sufficient to prepare five phase change sets).
- These five phase change values (or phase change sets) are PHASE [0], PHASE [1] , PHASE [2], PHASE [3], PHASE [4].
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 slots
- phase PHASE [ Slots using 1] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [2] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [3] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [4] are 300 slots.
- the modulation method is 16QAM
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [0] is 150 slots, 150 slots using phase PHASE [1], 150 slots using phase PHASE [2], 150 slots using phase PHASE [3], 150 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 100 slots, 100 slots using phase PHASE [1], 100 slots using phase PHASE [2], 100 slots using phase PHASE [3], and 100 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 67 and the transmission apparatus of FIG. 70, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 67 and 70 in FIG. 67 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 1500 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting the two encoded blocks
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- two encoded blocks are used. 1000 slots are needed to transmit all the bits that make up.
- phase change values or phase change sets prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission device of FIG. 67 and the transmission device of FIG. (As shown in FIG. 69, when the phase change is performed only on the baseband signal q2 after replacement, five phase change values may be prepared in order to change the phase of cycle 5. Also, the base after the replacement is prepared. If to both band signals q 1 and replaced after the baseband signal q2 perform the phase change is called for one slot, changing the two phase values are needed.
- phase change sets are designated as PHASE [0], PHASE [1 ], PHASE [2], PHASE [3], PHASE [4].
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 600 slots
- Slots that use PHASE [1] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [4] are 600 slots Need to be. This is because, depending on the phase to be used, the influence of the phase using a large number is large, and the reception quality of data depending on this influence is obtained in the receiving apparatus.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [3] must be 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] must be 600 times
- the phase PHASE Slots that use [0] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] should be 600 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is It is necessary that the slot using the phase PHASE [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 300 times
- the number of slots using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [3] needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] needs to be 200 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 200 times
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [4] may be 200.
- K 0,2 K 0,2
- K 1, 2 K 1, 2.
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1] are used as N phase change values (or phase change sets).
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2],
- the phase can also be changed by placing symbols in the time axis and frequency-time axis blocks in PHASE [N-1].
- N phase change values or phase change sets
- N phase change values or phase change sets
- a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system There are also modes of a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system, a MIMO transmission system with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding system, a method of transmitting only one stream, and a method of regularly changing the phase.
- the base station may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation scheme from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change).
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream,
- the method may be set to any one of the methods for changing the phase regularly.
- the (sub) carrier group for which the method for changing the phase regularly is selected may be implemented.
- the transmission apparatus that performs precoding, baseband signal replacement, and phase change described in this embodiment and the contents described in this specification can be used in combination, and in particular, in this embodiment. It is possible to combine and use the contents relating to all the phase changes described in this specification for the phase change unit described.
- Non-Patent Document 12 to Non-Patent Document 15 QC (Quasi-Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density-Parity-Check) code (not QC-LDPC code, LDPC code may be used), LDPC code And a BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) concatenated code, a turbo code using tail biting, or a block code such as Duo-Binary Turbo Code is considered.
- QC-Cyclic Low-Density-Parity-Check
- BCH code Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code
- turbo code using tail biting or a block code such as Duo-Binary Turbo Code
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameter, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- FIG. 34 shows, for example, a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted to the above-described transmission apparatus, and the transmission apparatus has one encoder.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.)
- the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the above-described transmitting apparatus transmits two streams simultaneously, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2, so s1 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in step S1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in step s2.
- the modulation scheme is 16QAM
- 750 slots are required to transmit all the bits constituting one encoded block
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- all the blocks constituting one block are transmitted. 500 slots are required to transmit bits.
- FIG. 71 (a) shows a frame configuration on the time and frequency axes of the modulated signal z1 'or z1 (transmitted by the antenna 312A).
- FIG. 71 (b) shows a frame configuration on the time and frequency axes of the modulated signal z2 (transmitted by the antenna 312B).
- the frequency (band) used by the modulation signal z1 ′ or z1 and the frequency (band) used by the modulation signal z2 are the same, and the modulation signal z1 ′ or z1 and the modulation signal at the same time.
- z2 exists.
- the transmitting apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in the section A, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to the communication partner. It is assumed that modulation scheme information for transmitting two encoded blocks is included.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the first encoded block in the section B.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the second encoded block in section C.
- the transmission apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section D, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to a communication partner.
- a preamble control symbol
- the transmission apparatus transmits the third encoded block in the section E.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the fourth encoded block in section F.
- the transmitting apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section A, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to the communication partner. It is assumed that modulation scheme information for transmitting two encoded blocks is included.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the first encoded block in the section B.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the second encoded block in section C.
- the transmission apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section D, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to a communication partner.
- a preamble control symbol
- the transmission apparatus transmits the third encoded block in the section E.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the fourth encoded block in section F.
- FIG. 72 shows the number of slots used when 16QAM is used as the modulation scheme in the case of transmitting a coding block as shown in FIG. 34, particularly in the first coding block. 750 slots are required to transmit.
- the second encoded block indicates the number of slots to be used when QPSK is used as a modulation scheme, and 1500 slots are required to transmit the second encoded block.
- FIG. 73 shows the number of slots used when transmitting a coded block as shown in FIG. 34, particularly in the third coded block, when QPSK is used as the modulation scheme. 1,500 slots are required to transmit.
- the modulation signal z1 that is, the modulation signal transmitted by the antenna 312A
- the modulation signal z2 that is, the modulation signal transmitted by the antenna 312B
- phase change values are prepared, and the seven phase change values are named # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, and # 6.
- the phase change is used regularly and periodically. That is, the phase change values are # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, #
- the change is made regularly and periodically, such as 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6,.
- phase change value used to transmit the first slot of each coding block is fixed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 72, the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the second encoded block is the same as the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the first encoded block. Similarly, it is # 0.
- the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the third encoded block is not # 3, but the first change of the first and second encoded blocks. Similar to the phase change value used to transmit the slot, it is assumed to be # 0.
- the method of initializing the phase change value for each coding block that is, the method of fixing the phase change value used for the first slot of any coding block as # 0 has been described.
- it can be performed in units of frames.
- the phase change value used in the first slot may be fixed to # 0.
- the precoding matrix used by the weighting synthesis unit for precoding is expressed as a complex number, but the precoding matrix can also be expressed as a real number.
- two mapped baseband signals are s1 (i) and s2 (i) (where i is time or frequency), and two precodings obtained for precoding are used.
- the baseband signals after coding are z1 (i) and z2 (i).
- the baseband signal after mapping (of the modulation scheme used) is the in-phase component of s1 (i) as I s1 (i), the quadrature component as Q s1 (i), and the base after mapping (of the modulation scheme used)
- the in-phase component of the band signal s2 (i) is I s2 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q s2 (i)
- the baseband signal after precoding is the in-phase component of z1 (i), I z1 (i)
- I z2 (i) an in-phase component of a baseband signal after precoding z2 (i)
- the quadrature component configured in real H r
- the following relational expression is established.
- the precoding matrix H r which is composed of a real number is represented as shown below.
- a 11, a 12, a 13, a 14, a 21, a 22, a 23, a 24, a 31, a 32, a 33, a 34, a 41, a 42, a 43, a 44 Is a real number.
- a transmission method using a DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) -T2 (T: Terrestrial) standard is used as a transmission method for changing the phase of a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement).
- DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
- T2 Terrestrial
- a case of applying to a system will be described.
- First, the frame configuration of a broadcasting system using the DVB-T2 standard will be described.
- FIG. 74 shows an outline of a frame configuration of a signal transmitted by a broadcasting station in the DVB-T2 standard.
- a frame is formed on the time-frequency axis.
- FIG. 74 shows a frame structure on the time-frequency axis.
- the frame includes P1 Signalling data (7401), L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402), L1 Post-Signalling data (7403), Common PLP (7404), PLP # 1 to #N (7405_1 to 7405_N) (PLP: Physical Layer Layer).
- L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402) and L1 Post-Signalling data (7403) are referred to as P2 symbols.
- P1 Signalling data (7401), L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402), and L1 Post A frame composed of -Signalling data (7403), Common PLP (7404), and PLP # 1 to #N (7405_1 to 7405_N) is named a T2 frame and is a unit of the frame configuration.
- P1 Signaling data (7401) is a symbol for the receiver to perform signal detection and frequency synchronization (including frequency offset estimation), and at the same time, FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) size information in the frame, SISO (Single-Input) Information on whether to transmit the modulation signal is transmitted in either a single-output (MISO) / multi-input single-output (MISO) system.
- FFT Fast Fourier Transform
- SISO Single-Input
- L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402) is used to transmit guard interval information used in a transmission frame, information on a signal processing method performed to reduce PAPR (Peak to Average Power Ratio), and L1 Post-Signalling data.
- Modulation method error correction method (FEC: Forward Error Correction), coding rate information of error correction method, L1 Post-Signalling data size and information size information, pilot pattern information, cell (frequency domain) unique number Information, information indicating which mode of normal mode and extended mode (the number of subcarriers used for data transmission differs between normal mode and extended mode) is used, and the like are transmitted.
- FEC Forward Error Correction
- coding rate information of error correction method L1 Post-Signalling data size and information size information, pilot pattern information, cell (frequency domain) unique number Information, information indicating which mode of normal mode and extended mode (the number of subcarriers used for data transmission differs between normal mode and extended mode) is used, and the like are transmitted.
- FEC Forward Error Correction
- L1 Post-Signalling data size and information size information pilot pattern information
- cell (frequency domain) unique number Information information indicating which mode of normal mode and extended mode (the number of subcarriers used for data transmission differs between normal mode and extended mode) is used
- L1 Post-Signalling data (7403)
- the coding rate information, the number of blocks transmitted by each PLP, and the like are transmitted.
- PLP 7404 and PLP # 1 to #N are areas for transmitting data.
- P174Signalling data (7401), L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402), L1 Post-Signalling data (7403), Common PLP (7404), and PLP # 1 to #N (7405_1 to 6105_N)
- L1 Pre-Signalling data, L1 Post-Signalling data and Common PLP may exist at the same time, or PLP # 1 and PLP # 2 may exist at the same time. . That is, each signal uses a time division and a frequency division together to form a frame.
- FIG. 76 shows a transmission apparatus in which a transmission method for changing the phase of a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is applied to a transmission apparatus (for example, a broadcasting station) in the DVB-T2 standard. An example of the configuration is shown.
- a PLP signal generation unit 7602 receives PLP transmission data 7601 (multiple PLP data) and a control signal 7609 as input, and information on error correction coding of each PLP included in the control signal 7609, information on modulation schemes, and the like. Based on the information, error correction coding and mapping based on the modulation method are performed, and a PLP (orthogonal) baseband signal 7603 is output.
- P2 symbol signal generation section 7605 receives P2 symbol transmission data 7604 and control signal 7609 as input, and performs error correction coding based on information such as P2 symbol error correction information and modulation scheme information contained in control signal 7609. Then, mapping based on the modulation scheme is performed, and a (orthogonal) baseband signal 7606 of P2 symbols is output.
- the control signal generator 7608 receives the P1 symbol transmission data 7607 and the P2 symbol transmission data 7604 as input, and each symbol group in FIG. 74 (P1 Signalling data (7401), L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402), L1 Post).
- -Signalling data (7403), Common PLP (7404), PLP # 1 to #N (7405_1 to 7405_N)) transmission method (error correction code, error correction code coding rate, modulation method, block length, frame configuration, Information on the selected transmission method including a transmission method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, pilot symbol insertion method, information on PAPR reduction method and information on guard interval insertion method, such as IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) / FFT information Is output as a control signal 7609.
- IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
- a frame configuration unit 7610 receives a PLP baseband signal 7603, a P2 symbol baseband signal 7606, and a control signal 7609, and performs rearrangement in frequency and time axis based on the frame configuration information included in the control signal.
- the stream 1 (orthogonal) baseband signal 7611_1 the signal after mapping, that is, the baseband signal based on the modulation scheme used
- the stream 2 (orthogonal) baseband signal 7611_2 the signal after mapping
- the signal processing unit 7612 receives the baseband signal 7611_1 of the stream 1, the baseband signal 7611_2 of the stream 2, and the control signal 7609, and the modulated signal 1 after signal processing based on the transmission method included in the control signal 7609 (7613_1) And modulated signal 2 (7613_2) after signal processing is output.
- a characteristic point here is that when a transmission method for changing the phase of a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is selected as a transmission method, the signal processing unit Similarly to FIGS. 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, and 69, the signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is subjected to phase change processing, and this signal processing is performed.
- the performed signals are modulated signal 1 (7613_1) after signal processing and modulated signal 2 (7613_2) after signal processing.
- Pilot insertion section 7614_1 receives modulated signal 1 (7613_1) after signal processing and control signal 7609 as input, and modulates signal 1 (7613_1) after signal processing based on information regarding the pilot symbol insertion method included in control signal 7609. A pilot symbol is inserted into, and a modulated signal 7615_1 after the pilot symbol is inserted is output.
- Pilot insertion section 7614_2 receives modulated signal 2 (7613_2) after signal processing and control signal 7609 as input, and modulates signal 2 after signal processing (7613_2) based on information regarding the pilot symbol insertion method included in control signal 7609. A pilot symbol is inserted into, and a modulated signal 7615_2 after the pilot symbol is inserted is output.
- IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform section 7616_1 receives modulated signal 7615_1 after pilot symbol insertion and control signal 7609 as input, performs IFFT based on IFFT method information included in control signal 7609, and outputs signal 7617_1 after IFFT. Is output.
- IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
- IFFT section 7616_2 receives modulated signal 7615_2 after pilot symbol insertion and control signal 7609 as input, performs IFFT based on information on the IFFT method included in control signal 7609, and outputs post-IFFT signal 7617_2.
- the PAPR reduction unit 7618_1 receives the signal 7617_1 after IFFT and the control signal 7609 as input, performs a process for PAPR reduction on the signal 7617_1 after IFFT based on information on PAPR reduction included in the control signal 7609, and after PAPR reduction
- the signal 7619_1 is output.
- PAPR reduction section 7618_2 receives signal 7617_2 after IFFT and control signal 7609 as input, and performs processing for PAPR reduction on signal 7617_2 after IFFT based on information related to PAPR reduction included in control signal 7609.
- the signal 7619_2 is output.
- the guard interval insertion unit 7620_1 receives the signal 7619_1 after PAPR reduction and the control signal 7609 as inputs, and inserts a guard interval into the signal 7619_1 after PAPR reduction based on the information on the guard interval insertion method included in the control signal 7609. A signal 7621_1 after the insertion of the guard interval is output.
- the guard interval insertion unit 7620_2 receives the signal 7619_2 after PAPR reduction and the control signal 7609 as inputs, and inserts a guard interval into the signal 7619_2 after PAPR reduction based on the information on the guard interval insertion method included in the control signal 7609.
- the signal 7621_2 after insertion of the guard interval is output.
- the P1 symbol insertion unit 7622 receives the signal 7621_1 after the guard interval insertion, the signal 7621_2 after the guard interval insertion, and the transmission data 7607 for the P1 symbol, and generates a P1 symbol signal from the transmission data 7607 for the P1 symbol, A P1 symbol is added to the signal 7621_1 after the insertion of the guard interval, a P1 symbol is added to the signal 7623_1 after the addition of the P1 symbol, and a signal 7621_2 after the insertion of the guard interval, and a P1 symbol is added.
- the later signal 7623_2 is output.
- the signal of the P1 symbol may be added to both the signal 7623_1 after the addition of the P1 symbol and the signal 7623_2 after the addition of the P1 symbol, or may be added to either of them.
- a zero signal is present as the baseband signal in the signal that is not added in the section where the added signal is added.
- the wireless processing unit 7624_1 receives the signal 7623_1 after the addition of the P1 symbol and the control signal 7609, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, and outputs a transmission signal 7625_1. Then, the transmission signal 7625_1 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 7626_1.
- the wireless processing unit 7624_2 receives the signal 7623_2 after the P1 symbol processing and the control signal 7609 as input, and performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, and outputs a transmission signal 7625_2. Then, the transmission signal 7625_2 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 7626_2.
- FIG. 77 shows an example of a frame configuration on the frequency-time axis when a plurality of PLPs are transmitted after transmitting the P1 symbol, the P2 symbol, and the Common PLP.
- stream s1 mapped signal, that is, a baseband signal based on the modulation scheme to be used
- stream s2 uses subcarrier # 1 to subcarrier #M on the frequency axis
- Subsequent signals that is, baseband signals based on the modulation scheme to be used, also use subcarriers # 1 to #M on the frequency axis. Therefore, if symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, symbols of two streams exist at the same frequency.
- s1 and s2 are precoding. Weighting and synthesis are performed using a matrix (and, in some cases, baseband signal replacement is performed thereafter), and in addition, a phase change is performed. Thus, if the obtained signals are z1 and z2 here, z1 and z2 are respectively output from the antenna.
- section 1 transmits PLP # 1 symbol group 7701 using stream s1 and stream s2, and the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme shown in FIG. 23 or the precoding matrix is fixed. It is assumed that data is transmitted using the MIMO transmission method (no phase change is performed).
- a symbol group 7703 of PLP # 3 is transmitted using stream s1 and stream s2, and a transmission method for changing the phase of a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is performed. Used to transmit data.
Abstract
Description
従来、マルチアンテナを用いた通信方法として例えばMIMO(Multiple-Input Multiple-Output)と呼ばれる通信方法がある。MIMOに代表されるマルチアンテナ通信では、複数系列の送信データをそれぞれ変調し、各変調信号を異なるアンテナから同時に送信することで、データの通信速度を高めるようになっている。
図24の(A)(B)は、レイリ-フェージング環境、及びライスファクタK=3、10、16dBのライスフェージング環境において、LDPC(low-density parity-check)符号化されたデータを2×2(2アンテナ送信、2アンテナ受信)空間多重MIMO伝送した場合のBER(Bit Error Rate)特性(縦軸:BER、横軸:SNR(signal-to-noise power ratio))のシミュレーション結果の一例を示している。図24の(A)は、反復検波を行わないMax-log-APP(非特許文献1、非特許文献2参照)(APP:a posterior probability)のBER特性、図24の(B)は、反復検波を行ったMax-log-APP(非特許文献1、非特許文献2参照)(反復回数5回)のBER特性を示している。図24(A)(B)からわかるように、反復検波を行う、または行わないに関係なく、空間多重MIMOシステムでは、ライスファクタが大きくなると受信品質が劣化することが確認できる。このことから、「空間多重MIMOシステムでは、伝搬環境が安定的になると受信品質が劣化する」という従来のシングルの変調信号を送信するシステムにはない、空間多重MIMOシステム固有の課題をもつことがわかる。
(実施の形態1)
本実施の形態の送信方法、送信装置、受信方法、受信装置について詳しく説明する。
ここでは、NtxNr空間多重MIMOシステムにおけるMIMO信号の反復検波について述べる。
umnの対数尤度比を式(6)のように定義する。
<システムモデル>
図23に、以降の説明につながるシステムの基本構成を示す。ここでは、2×2空間多重MIMOシステムとし、ストリームA,Bではそれぞれにouterエンコーダがあり、2つのouterエンコーダは同一のLDPC符号のエンコーダとする(ここではouterエンコーダとしてLDPC符号のエンコーダを用いる構成を例に挙げて説明するが、outerエンコーダが用いる誤り訂正符号はLDPC符号に限ったものではなく、ターボ符号、畳み込み符号、LDPC畳み込み符号等の他の誤り訂正符号を用いても同様に実施することができる。また、outerエンコーダは、送信アンテナごとに有する構成としているがこれに限ったものではなく、送信アンテナが複数であっても、outerエンコーダは一つであってもよく、また、送信アンテナ数より多くのouterエンコーダを有していてもよい。)。そして、ストリームA,Bではそれぞれにインタリーバ(πa,πb)がある。ここでは、変調方式を2h-QAMとする(1シンボルでhビットを送信することになる。)。
<反復復号>
ここでは、受信機におけるLDPC符号の復号で用いるsum-product復号およびMIMO信号の反復検波のアルゴリズムについて詳しく述べる。
2元MxN行列H={Hmn}を復号対象とするLDPC符号の検査行列とする。集合[1,N]={1,2,・・・,N}の部分集合A(m),B(n)を次式のように定義する。
Step A・1(初期化):Hmn=1を満たす全ての組(m,n)に対して事前値対数比βmn=0とする。ループ変数(反復回数)lsum=1とし、ループ最大回数をlsum,maxと設定する。
Step A・2(行処理):m=1,2,・・・,Mの順にHmn=1を満たす全ての組(m,n)に対して、以下の更新式を用いて外部値対数比αmnを更新する。
Step A・3(列処理):n=1,2,・・・,Nの順にHmn=1を満たす全ての組(m,n)に対して、以下の更新式を用いて外部値対数比βmnを更新する。
<MIMO信号の反復検波>
ここでは、MIMO信号の反復検波におけるλnの求め方について詳しく説明する。
反復APP復号のとき:
反復APP復号のとき:
マッピング部306Aは、インタリーブ後のデータ305A、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、QPSK(Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)、16QAM(16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)、64QAM(64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)等の変調を施し、ベースバンド信号307Aを出力する。(フレーム構成信号313に基づき、変調方式は、切り替えても良い。)
図19は、QPSK変調におけるベースバンド信号を構成する同相成分Iと直交成分QのIQ平面におけるマッピング方法の一例としている。例えば、図19(A)のように、入力データが「00」の場合、I=1.0、Q=1.0が出力され、以下同様に、入力データが「01」の場合、I=―1.0、Q=1.0が出力され、・・・、が出力される。図19(B)は、図19(A)とは異なるQPSK変調のIQ平面におけるマッピング方法の例であり、図19(B)が図19(A)と異なる点は、図19(A)における信号点が、原点を中心に回転させることで図19(B)の信号点を得ることができる。このようなコンスタレーションの回転方法については、非特許文献9、非特許文献10に示されており、また、非特許文献9、非特許文献10に示されているCyclic Q Delayを適用してもよい。図19とは別の例として、図20に16QAMのときのIQ平面における信号点配置を示しており、図19(A)に相当する例が図20(A)であり、図19(B)に相当する例が図20(B)となる。
マッピング部306Bは、インタリーブ後のデータ305B、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、QPSK(Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)、16QAM(16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)、64QAM(64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)等の変調を施し、ベースバンド信号307Bを出力する。(フレーム構成信号313に基づき、変調方式は、切り替えても良い。)
信号処理方法情報生成部314は、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313に基づいた信号処理方法に関する情報315を出力する。なお、信号処理方法に関する情報315は、どのプリコーディング行列を固定的に用いるのかを指定する情報と、位相を変更する位相変更パターンの情報を含む。
INNER MIMO検波部803は、ベースバンド信号801X、チャネル推定信号群802X、ベースバンド信号801Y、チャネル推定信号群802Yを入力とする。ここでは、変調信号(ストリーム)s1、変調信号(ストリーム)s2の変調方式が16QAMとして説明する。
インタリーバ(813A)は、k-1回目のsoft-in/soft-outデコードで得られた復号後の対数尤度比812Aを入力とし、インタリーブを行い、インタリーブ後の対数尤度比814Aを出力する。このとき、インタリーブ(813A)のインタリーブのパターンは、図3のインタリーバ(304A)のインタリーブパターンと同様である。
(実施の形態2)
上記実施の形態1においては、重み付け合成された(固定のプリコーディング行列でプリコーディングされた)信号z(t)の位相を変更することとした。ここでは、上記実施の形態1と同等の効果を得られる位相変更方法の各種の実施形態について開示する。
時刻8kのとき、y1(8k)=ej0、y2(8k)=1、
時刻8k+1のとき、y1(8k+1)=ejπ/2、y2(8k+1)=1、
時刻8k+2のとき、y1(8k+2)=ejπ、y2(8k+2)=1、
時刻8k+3のとき、y1(8k+3)=ej3π/2、y2(8k+3)=1、
時刻8k+4のとき、y1(8k+4)=1、y2(8k+4)=ej0、
時刻8k+5のとき、y1(8k+5)=1、y2(8k+5)=ejπ/2、
時刻8k+6のとき、y1(8k+6)=1、y2(8k+6)=ejπ、
時刻8k+7のとき、y1(8k+7)=1、y2(8k+7)=ej3π/2
となる。
図29の位相変更部317Aは、s1’(t)=y1(t)s1(t)となるように、また、位相変更部317Bは、s2’(t)=y2(t)s2(t)となるように、位相の変更を行うことになる。
時刻8kのとき、y1(8k)=ej0、y2(8k)=1、
時刻8k+1のとき、y1(8k+1)=ejπ/2、y2(8k+1)=1、
時刻8k+2のとき、y1(8k+2)=ejπ、y2(8k+2)=1、
時刻8k+3のとき、y1(8k+3)=ej3π/2、y2(8k+3)=1、
時刻8k+4のとき、y1(8k+4)=1、y2(8k+4)=ej0、
時刻8k+5のとき、y1(8k+5)=1、y2(8k+5)=ejπ/2、
時刻8k+6のとき、y1(8k+6)=1、y2(8k+6)=ejπ、
時刻8k+7のとき、y1(8k+7)=1、y2(8k+7)=ej3π/2
となる。
これによって、受信装置側における送信信号z1(t)及びz2(t)を受信したときのそれぞれの受信状態を均等にすることができるとともに、受信した信号z1(t)及びz2(t)それぞれのシンボルにおいて位相が周期的に切り替えられることにより、誤り訂正復号後の誤り訂正能力を向上させることができるので、LOS環境における受信品質を向上させることができる。
(実施の形態3)
上記実施の形態1及び2においては、位相を規則的に変更することとした。本実施の形態3においては、送信装置から見て、各所に点在することになる受信装置において、受信装置がどこに配置されていても、各受信装置が良好なデータの受信品質を得るための手法について開示する。
図31は、図12に示した位相変更部317Bの入力である変調信号z2’のフレーム構成を示しており、1つの四角がシンボル(ただし、プリコーディングを行っているため、s1とs2の両者の信号を含んでいるのが通常であるが、プリコーディング行列の構成次第では、s1とs2の一方の信号のみであることもある。)を示している。
<条件#1>
図6のように、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応するプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYにおけるそれぞれのプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
<条件#2>
図6のように、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応するプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれのプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
そして、<条件#1>を満たすデータシンボルが存在するとよい。同様に、<条件2>を満たすデータシンボルが存在するとよい。
<条件#3>
図6のように、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、かつ、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら5つのデータシンボルに対応するプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、つまり、時間X・キャリアYおよび時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYおよび時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれのプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
ここで、「異なる位相変更」について、補足を行う。位相変更は、0ラジアンから2πラジアンで定義されることになる。例えば、時間X・キャリアYにおいて、図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対して施す位相変更をejθX,Y、時間X-1・キャリアYにおいて、図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対して施す位相変更をejθX-1,Y、時間X+1・キャリアYにおいて、図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対して施す位相変更をejθX+1,Yとすると、0ラジアン≦θX,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX-1,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX+1,Y<2πとなる。したがって、<条件#1>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX+1,Y≠θX-1,Yが成立することになる。同様に考えると、<条件#2>では、θX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX-1,Y+1が成立することになり、<条件#3>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX-1,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX,Y+1が成立することになる。
以上のようにすることで、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’の位相変更は周期10であるが、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z1’の位相変更とプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’の位相変更の両者を考慮したときの周期は10より大きくすることができるという効果を得ることができる。これにより、受信装置のデータの受信品質が向上する可能性がある。
選択部5301は、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313が示したシンボルのベースバンド信号を選択し、出力する。
同様に、位相変更部5201は、図54のように、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とする。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、データシンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号309Aに対し、位相変更を施す。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、パイロットシンボル(またはヌルシンボル)、または、制御情報シンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、位相変更の動作を停止し、各シンボルのベースバンド信号をそのまま出力する。(解釈としては、「ej0」に相当する位相回転を強制的に行っていると考えればよい。)
上述の説明では、パイロットシンボルと制御シンボルとデータシンボルを例に説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、プリコーディングとは異なる伝送方法、例えば、1アンテナ送信、時空間ブロック符号を用いた伝送方式、等を用いて伝送するシンボルであれば、同様に、位相変更を与えない、ということが重要となり、これとは逆に、プリコーディングを行ったシンボルに対しては、位相変更を行うことが本発明では重要なこととなる。
(実施の形態4)
上記実施の形態1及び2においては、位相を規則的に変更すること、実施の形態3においては、隣り合うシンボルの位相の変更の度合いを異ならせることを開示した。
(実施の形態A1)
本実施の形態では、非特許文献12~非特許文献15に示されているように、QC(Quasi Cyclic)LDPC(Low-Density Parity-Check)符号(QC-LDPC符号でない、LDPC符号であってもよい)、LDPC符号とBCH符号(Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)の連接符号、テイルバイティングを用いたターボ符号またはDuo-Binary Turbo Code等のブロック符号を用いたときの規則的に位相を変更する方法について詳しく説明する。ここでは、一例として、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信する場合を例に説明する。ただし、ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等が必要でないとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数(ただし、この中に、以下で記載するような制御情報等が含まれていてもよい。)と一致する。ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等(例えば、CRC(cyclic redundancy check)、伝送パラメータ等)が必要であるとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数と制御情報等のビット数の和であることもある。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#A01>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#A02>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図3の送信装置および図12の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#A03>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,1としたとき、
<条件#A04>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=KN-1,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,2としたとき、
<条件#A05>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=KN-1,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#A06>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#A07>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#A08>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと乗じる位相の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
特に、規則的に位相を変更する方法を選択した(サブ)キャリア群では、本実施の形態を実施するとよい。
(実施の形態B1)
以下では、上記各実施の形態で示した送信方法及び受信方法の応用例とそれを用いたシステムの構成例を説明する。
(多重化データ)
次に、多重化データの構造の一例について詳細に説明する。放送に用いられるデータ構造としてはMPEG2-トランスポートストリーム(TS)が一般的であり、ここではMPEG2-TSを例に挙げて説明する。しかし、上記各実施の形態で示した送信方法及び受信方法で伝送される多重化データのデータ構造はMPEG2-TSに限られず、他のいかなるデータ構造であっても上記の各実施の形態で説明した効果を得られることは言うまでもない。
(その他補足)
本明細書において、送信装置を具備しているのは、例えば、放送局、基地局、アクセスポイント、端末、携帯電話(mobile phone)等の通信・放送機器であることが考えられ、このとき、受信装置を具備しているのは、テレビ、ラジオ、端末、パーソナルコンピュータ、携帯電話、アクセスポイント、基地局等の通信機器であることが考えられる。また、本発明における送信装置、受信装置は、通信機能を有している機器であって、その機器が、テレビ、ラジオ、パーソナルコンピュータ、携帯電話等のアプリケーションを実行するための装置に何らかのインターフェース(例えば、USB)を介して接続できるような形態であることも考えられる。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
とし、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ1、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ2から、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信する、というように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)に相当する変調信号と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)を異なるアンテナから、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信するとしてもよい。また、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
としてもよい。また、上述では、2ストリームの信号に対し両者の信号処理を行い、両者の信号処理後の信号の同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えについて説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、2ストリームより多い信号に対し両者の信号処理後を行い、両者の信号処理後の信号の同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えを行うことも可能である。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
図55は、上記の記載を説明するためのベースバンド信号入れ替え部5502を示す図である。図55に示すように、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z1(i)5501_1、z2(i)5501_2において、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z1(i)5501_1の同相I成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)とし、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z2(i)5501_2の同相I成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)とする。そして、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)5503_1の同相成分をIr1(i)、直交成分をQr1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)5503_2の同相成分をIr2(i)、直交成分をQr2(i)とすると、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)5503_1の同相成分Ir1(i)、直交成分Qr1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)5503_2の同相成分Ir2(i)、直交成分をQr2(i)は上述で説明したいずれかであらわされるものとする。なお、この例では、同一時刻(同一周波数((サブ)キャリア))の両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号の入れ替えについて説明したが、上述のように、異なる時刻(異なる周波数((サブ)キャリア))の両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号の入れ替えであってもよい。
a=r×cosθ、
b=r×sinθ
(実施の形態C1)
本実施の形態では、実施の形態1で、送信パラメータを変更した際、使用するプリコーディング行列を切り替える場合について説明したが、本実施の形態では、その詳細の例について、上述の(その他の補足)で述べたように、送信パラメータとして、ストリームs1(t)、s2(t)において、異なるデータを伝送する場合と同一のデータを伝送する場合で切り替えるときに、使用するプリコーディング行列を切り替える方法、および、これに伴う位相変更方法について説明する。
なお、図56において、位相変更後のベースバンド信号5202は、OFDMを用いている場合、IFFT、周波数変換等の処理を施し、送信アンテナから送信される。(図13参照)(したがって、位相変更後のベースバンド信号5202は、図13の信号1301Aであると考えればよい。)同様に、位相変更後のベースバンド信号309Bは、OFDMを用いている場合、IFFT、周波数変換等の処理を施し、送信アンテナから送信される。(図13参照)(したがって、位相変更後のベースバンド信号309Bは、図13の信号1301Bであると考えればよい。)
一方、送信モードとして、「異なるデータを送信する」が選択されている場合、実施の形態1で示したように、式(36)、式(39)、式(50)のいずれかであらわされるものとする。このとき、図56の位相変更部5201、317Bは、「同一のデータを送信」する場合とは異なる位相変更方法を行うことが重要となる。特に、この場合、実施の形態1で述べたように、例えば、位相変更部5201は位相変更を行い、位相変更部317Bは位相変更を行わない、または、位相変更部5201は位相変更を行わず、位相変更部317Bは位相変更を行う、というように、2つの位相変更部のうち、いずれか一方のみ位相変更を行う、というようにすれば、LOS環境、NLOS環境の両者で、受信装置は、良好なデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(実施の形態C2)
本実施の形態では、実施の形態C1を応用した基地局の構成方法について説明する。
(実施の形態C3)
本実施の形態では、実施の形態C1を応用した中継器の構成方法について説明する。なお、中継器は、中継局と呼称されることもある。
(実施の形態C4)
本実施の形態では、「実施の形態1」、「その他補足」で説明した位相変更方法とは異なる位相変更方法について説明する。
(実施の形態C5)
本実施の形態では、「実施の形態1」、「その他補足」、「実施の形態C4」で説明した位相変更方法とは異なる位相変更方法について説明する。
(実施の形態C6)
本実施の形態では、非特許文献12~非特許文献15に示されているように、QC(Quasi Cyclic)LDPC(Low-Density Parity-Check)符号(ただし、QC-LDPC符号でないLDPC(ブロック)符号であってもよい)、LDPC符号とBCH符号(Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)の連接符号等のブロック符号、ターボ符号またはDuo-Binary Turbo Code等のブロック符号を用いたときの、特に、実施の形態C5で述べた規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法を用いたときについて詳しく説明する。ここでは、一例として、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信する場合を例に説明する。ただし、ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等が必要でないとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数(ただし、この中に、以下で記載するような制御情報等が含まれていてもよい。)と一致する。ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等(例えば、CRC(cyclic redundancy check)、伝送パラメータ等)が必要であるとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数と制御情報等のビット数の和であることもある。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#C01>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=K2n、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#C02>
2×G0=G1=・・・=Gi=・・・=Gn、つまり、2×G0=Ga、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
そして、通信システムが、複数の変調方式をサポートしており、サポートしている変調方式から選択して使用する場合、サポートしている変調方式において、<条件#C01>(<条件#C02>)が成立するとよいことになる。
<条件#C03>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C03>を別の表現にすると、以下の条件となる。
<条件#C04>
GaとGbの差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga―Gb|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数)、a≠b)
および
2×G0とGaの差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0―Ga|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図3の送信装置および図12の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#C05>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=K2n、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,2n-1,2n(iは0以上2n以下の整数))、位相変更値P[2n] を使用する回数をK2n,1としたとき、
<条件#C06>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=K2n,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,2n-1,2n(iは0以上2n以下の整数))、 位相変更値P[2n] を使用する回数をK2n,2としたとき、
<条件#C07>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=K2n,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#C08>
2×G0=G1=・・・=Gi=・・・=Gn、つまり、2×G0=Ga、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値PHASE[0]を使用する回数をG0,1, 位相変更値PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相変更値PHASE[i]を使用する回数をGi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,n-1,n(iは0以上n以下の整数))、位相変更値PHASE[n] を使用する回数をGn,1としたとき、
<条件#C09>
2×G0,1=G1,1=・・・=Gi,1=・・・=Gn,1、つまり、2×G0,1=Ga,1、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値PHASE[0]を使用する回数をG0,2, 位相変更値PHASE[1]を使用する回数をG1,2、位相変更値PHASE[i]を使用する回数をGi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,n-1,n(iは0以上n以下の整数))、位相変更値PHASE[n] を使用する回数をGn,2としたとき、
<条件#C10>
2×G0,2=G1,2=・・・=Gi,2=・・・=Gn,2、つまり、2×G0,2=Ga,2、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
であるとよい。
<条件#C11>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C12>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C13>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C11><条件#C12><条件#C13>を別の表現にすると、以下の条件となる。
<条件#C14>
GaとGbの差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga―Gb|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数)、a≠b)
および
2×G0とGaの差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0―Ga|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
<条件#C15>
Ga,1とGb,1の差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga,1―Gb,1|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数)、a≠b)
および
2×G0,1とGa,1の差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0,1―Ga,1|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは、1以上n以下の整数))
<条件#C16>
Ga,2とGb,2の差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga,2―Gb,2|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数)、a≠b)
および
2×G0,2とGa,2の差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0,2―Ga,2|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは、1以上n以下の整数))
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと位相変更値の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相変更値にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
(実施の形態C7)
本実施の形態では、非特許文献12~非特許文献15に示されているように、QC(Quasi Cyclic)LDPC(Low-Density Parity-Check)符号(ただし、QC-LDPC符号でないLDPC(ブロック)符号であってもよい)、LDPC符号とBCH符号(Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)の連接符号等のブロック符号、ターボ符号またはDuo-Binary Turbo Code等のブロック符号を用いたときの、実施の形態A1、実施の形態C6を一般化させた場合について説明する。ここでは、一例として、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信する場合を例に説明する。ただし、ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等が必要でないとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数(ただし、この中に、以下で記載するような制御情報等が含まれていてもよい。)と一致する。ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等(例えば、CRC(cyclic redundancy check)、伝送パラメータ等)が必要であるとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数と制御情報等のビット数の和であることもある。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#C17>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#C18>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図3の送信装置および図12の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#C19>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、位相変更値P[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,1としたとき、
<条件#C20>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=KN-1,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、位相変更値P[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,2としたとき、
<条件#C21>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=KN-1,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#C22>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C23>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C24>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと位相変更値の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相変更値にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
(実施の形態D1)
本実施の形態では、まず、実施の形態1の変形例について説明する。図67は、本実施の形態における送信装置の構成の一例であり、図3と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付しており、また、以降では、図3での説明と同様に動作素部部分については、説明を省略する。そして、図67が図3と異なる点は、重み付け合成部の直後にベースバンド信号入れ替え部6702が挿入されている部分である。したがって、以降では、ベースバンド信号入れ替え部6702周辺の動作の動作を中心に説明を行う。
このとき、ベースバンド信号入れ替え部6702は、ベースバンド成分の入れ替えを行い、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
とし、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ1、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ2から、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信する、というように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)に相当する変調信号と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)を異なるアンテナから、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信するとしてもよい。また、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
としてもよい。また、上述では、重み付け合成後の信号309Aおよび重み付け合成後の信号316Bの同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えについて説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、2つの信号より多い信号同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えを行うことも可能である。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
重み付け合成後の信号309A(p1(i))の同相I成分Ip1(i)、直交Q成分をQp1(i)とあらわし、重み付け合成後の信号316B(p2(i))の同相I成分Ip2(i)、直交Q成分をQp2(i)とあらわす。そして、入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701A(q1(i))の同相I成分Iq1(i)、直交Q成分をQq1(i)とあらわし、入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701B(q2(i))の同相I成分Iq2(i)、直交Q成分をQq2(i)とあらわす。
INNER MIMO検波部803は、ベースバンド信号801X、チャネル推定信号群802X、ベースバンド信号801Y、チャネル推定信号群802Yを入力とする。ここでは、変調信号(ストリーム)s1、変調信号(ストリーム)s2の変調方式が16QAMとして説明する。
インタリーバ(813A)は、k-1回目のsoft-in/soft-outデコードで得られた復号後の対数尤度比812Aを入力とし、インタリーブを行い、インタリーブ後の対数尤度比814Aを出力する。このとき、インタリーブ(813A)のインタリーブのパターンは、図67のインタリーバ(304A)のインタリーブパターンと同様である。
<条件#D1-1>
図69のように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応する入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYにおけるそれぞれの入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
<条件#D1-2>
図69のように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応する入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれの入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
そして、<条件#D1-1>を満たすデータシンボルが存在するとよい。同様に、<条件#D1-2>を満たすデータシンボルが存在するとよい。
<条件#D1-3>
図69のように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、かつ、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら5つのデータシンボルに対応する入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、つまり、時間X・キャリアYおよび時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYおよび時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれの入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
ここで、「異なる位相変更」について、補足を行う。位相変更は、0ラジアンから2πラジアンで定義されることになる。例えば、時間X・キャリアYにおいて、図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対して施す位相変更をejθX,Y、時間X-1・キャリアYにおいて、図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対して施す位相変更をejθX-1,Y、時間X+1・キャリアYにおいて、図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対して施す位相変更をejθX+1,Yとすると、0ラジアン≦θX,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX-1,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX+1,Y<2πとなる。したがって、<条件#D1-1>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX+1,Y≠θX-1,Yが成立することになる。同様に考えると、<条件#D1-2>では、θX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX-1,Y+1が成立することになり、<条件#D1-3>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX-1,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX,Y+1が成立することになる。
以上のようにすることで、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更は周期10であるが、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1の位相変更と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更の両者を考慮したときの周期は10より大きくすることができるという効果を得ることができる。これにより、受信装置のデータの受信品質が向上する可能性がある。
選択部5301は、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313が示したシンボルのベースバンド信号を選択し、出力する。
同様に、位相変更部5201は、図54のように、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とする。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、データシンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号309Aに対し、位相変更を施す。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、パイロットシンボル(またはヌルシンボル)、または、制御情報シンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、位相変更の動作を停止し、各シンボルのベースバンド信号をそのまま出力する。(解釈としては、「ej0」に相当する位相回転を強制的に行っていると考えればよい。)
上述の説明では、パイロットシンボルと制御シンボルとデータシンボルを例に説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、プリコーディングとは異なる伝送方法、例えば、1アンテナ送信、時空間ブロック符号を用いた伝送方式、等を用いて伝送するシンボルであれば、同様に、位相変更を与えない、ということが重要となり、これとは逆に、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替えを行ったシンボルに対しては、位相変更を行うことが本発明では重要なこととなる。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#D1-4>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#D1-5>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図67の送信装置および図70の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
<条件#D1-6>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,1としたとき、
<条件#D1-7>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=KN-1,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,2としたとき、
<条件#D1-8>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=KN-1,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#D1-9>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#D1-10>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#D1-11>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと乗じる位相の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
(実施の形態D2)
本実施の形態では、図4の送信装置の場合、図4の送信装置に対しOFDM方式のようなマルチキャリア方式に対応した場合、図67、図70の送信装置に対し図4のように、一つの符号化器と分配部を適用した場合において、本明細書の中で説明した規則的に位相変更を行った場合の位相変更のイニシャライズ方法について説明する。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、第2符号化ブロックの各スロットに対し、位相変更を適用することになる。本明細書では、マルチキャスト通信、放送に適用する場合を想定しているので、ある受信端末は、第1符号化ブロックを必要とせず、第2符号化ブロックのみ抽出する場合が考えられる。この場合、第1符号化ブロックの最後のスロットを送信するために位相変更値#0を用いたからといって、第2符号化ブロックを伝送するために、最初に位相変更値#1を用いたものとする。すると、
(a):前述の端末は、第1符号化ブロックがどのように送信されたかを監視、つまり、第1符号化ブロックの最後のスロットの送信に位相変更値がどのパターンであるかを監視し、第2符号化ブロックの最初のスロットに使用する位相変更値を推定する、
(b):(a)を行わないために、送信装置は、第2符号化ブロックの最初のスロットに使用する位相変更値の情報を伝送する
という方法が考えられる。(a)の場合、端末は第1符号化ブロックの伝送を監視する必要があるため消費電力が増大してしまい、(b)の場合、データの伝送効率の低下を招くことになる。
(実施の形態D3)
なお、上述の各実施の形態では、重み付け合成部がプリコーディングに使用するプリコーディング行列を複素数で表現しているが、プリコーディング行列を実数で表現することもできる。
(実施の形態E1)
本実施の形態では、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法を、DVB(Digital Video Broadcasting)-T2(T:Terrestrial)規格を用いた放送システムに適用する場合について説明する。はじめに、DVB―T2規格を用いた放送システムのフレーム構成について説明する。
L1 Pre-Signalling data(7402)により、送信フレームで使用するガードインターバルの情報、PAPR(Peak to Average Power Ratio)を削減するために行う信号処理方法に関する情報、L1 Post-Signalling dataを伝送する際の変調方式、誤り訂正方式(FEC: Forward Error Correction)、誤り訂正方式の符号化率の情報、L1 Post-Signalling dataのサイズおよび情報サイズの情報、パイロットパターンの情報、セル(周波数領域)固有番号の情報、ノーマルモードおよび拡張モード(ノーマルモードと拡張モードでは、データ伝送に用いるサブキャリア数が異なる。)のいずれの方式を用いているかの情報等を伝送する。
SISO: Single-Input Single-Output (一つの変調信号送信、一つのアンテナで受信)
SIMO: Single-Input Multiple-Output(一つの変調信号送信、複数のアンテナで受信)
MISO: Multiple-Input Single-Output(複数の変調信号を複数アンテナで送信、一つのアンテナで受信)
MIMO: Multiple-Input Multiple-Output(複数の変調信号を複数アンテナで送信、複数のアンテナで受信)
表3に示した2ビットの情報である「PLP_MODE」は、図77に示したように、各PLP(図77ではPLP#1のシンボル群から#4のシンボル群で示される。以下、簡略のために「のシンボル群」は省略して記載する。)の送信方法を端末に通知するための制御情報であり、PLP_MODEの情報は、PLPごとに存在することになる。つまり、図77の場合、PLP#1のためのPLP_MODEの情報、PLP#2のためのPLP_MODEの情報、PLP#3のためのPLP_MODEの情報、PLP#4のためのPLP_MODEの情報・・・が、放送局から送信されることになる。当然であるが、端末は、この情報を復調(また、誤り訂正復号も行う)することで、放送局がPLPに用いた伝送方式を認識することができる。
・#Aに用いる複数の位相変更と#Bに用いる複数の位相変更の中に、同一の位相変更を含むが、周期が異なる、
・#Aには含まれているが#Bには含まれていない位相変更値が存在する、
・#Aで使用する複数の位相変更を、#Bの方法では使用する位相変更に含まない
という3つの方法がある。
・ 固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
・ 固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化が選択可能な送信方法
・ 固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
・ プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
・ 固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法
・ プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化が選択可能な送信方法
・ プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
のように、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法を含むことで、LOS環境で、高速なデータ伝送を行うことができ、かつ、受信装置の受信データ品質を確保することができるという効果を得ることができる。
・「プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法」、「時空間ブロック符号」、「固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式」を選択可能
・「プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法」、「時空間ブロック符号」を選択可能
・「プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法」、「固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式」を選択可能
としてもよい。
・#Aに用いる複数の位相変更と#Bに用いる複数の位相変更の中に、同一の位相変更を含むが、周期が異なる、
・#Aには含まれるいるが#Bには含まれていない位相変更値が存在する、
・#Aで使用する複数の位相変更を、#Bの方法では使用する位相変更に含まない
という3つの方法がある。
・固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
・固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化が選択可能な送信方法
・固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
・プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
・固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法
・プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、時空間ブロック符号化が選択可能な送信方法
・プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法、ストリームs1のみ送信する伝送方式が選択可能な送信方法
のように、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法を含むことで、LOS環境で、高速なデータ伝送を行うことができ、かつ、受信装置の受信データ品質を確保することができるという効果を得ることができる。
・「プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法」、「時空間ブロック符号」、「固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式」を選択可能
・「プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法」、「時空間ブロック符号」を選択可能
・「プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法」、「固定的なプリコーディング行列を用いるMIMO方式」を選択可能
としてもよい。
(実施の形態E2)
本実施の形態では、実施の形態E1で説明した、DVB-T2規格を用いた通信システムに、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法を適用した方法を用いた時の受信方法、および、受信装置の構成について詳しく説明する。
(実施の形態E3)
実施の形態E1で記載した、DVB-T2規格に、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法を適用したシステムにおいて、L1 Pre-Signallingで、パイロットの挿入パターンを指定する制御情報が存在する。本実施の形態では、L1 pre-signallingでパイロット挿入パターンを変更するときの、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法の適用方法について説明する。
(cyclic Q delayについて)
本明細書の中で記載したCyclic Q Delayの適用について述べている。非特許文献10において、Cyclic Q Delay(サイクリックQディレイ)の概要が記載されている。以下では、Cyclic Q Delayを用いたときのs1,s2の生成方法の具体的な例について説明する。
(実施の形態F1)
実施の形態E1において、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法を、DVB-T2規格を用いた放送システムに適用する場合、及びDVB-T2規格とは異なる規格を用いた放送システムに適用する場合に関して説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態E1に対して、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーションに基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明する。
(実施の形態F2)
実施の形態F1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーションに基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態F1に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
(実施の形態F3)
実施の形態F1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーションに基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーションに関して、更に送信アンテナの偏波を考慮する場合について説明する。
(実施の形態F4)
実施の形態F3において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態F3に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
なお、以上の実施の形態F1~F4において、フレームに対するサブフレーム構造を示した。同様にして、スーパーフレームに対するフレーム構造など、長いフレームに対する短いフレーム構造に対して、以上の実施の形態F1~F4の内容を適用してもよい。
(実施の形態G1)
実施の形態F1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーションに基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーションに関して、更に送信電力を考慮する場合について説明する。
(実施の形態G2)
実施の形態G1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(送信電力も考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態G1に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
(実施の形態G3)
実施の形態F3において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮)に関して、更に送信電力を考慮する場合について説明する。
(実施の形態G4)
実施の形態G3において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波と送信電力も考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態G3に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
なお、以上の実施の形態G1~G4において、フレームに対するサブフレーム構造を示した。同様にして、スーパーフレームに対するフレーム構造など、長いフレームに対する短いフレーム構造に対して、以上の実施の形態G1~G4の内容を適用してもよい。
実施の形態F1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーションに基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、更にフレーム内の適切なサブフレーム順序について説明する。
(実施の形態H2)
実施の形態H1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(適切なサブフレーム順序)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H1に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
以上に示したsub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを用いた送信フレーム構造により、受信側における伝送路推定向上を可能とする。
ここで特徴的な点は、送信方法として、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法が選択されたとき、信号処理部7612は、図6、図25、図26、図27、図28、図29、図69と同様に、プリコーディング後(またはプリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う処理を行い、この信号処理を行われた信号が、信号処理後の変調信号1(7613_1)および信号処理後の変調信号2(7613_2)となる。但し、この送信方法を選択しなくてもよい。
また、図118を送信フレーム構造の一例として示したが、これに限らない。
(実施の形態H3)
実施の形態F3において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、更にフレーム内の適切なサブフレーム順序について説明する。
また、図119のサブフレーム構造では、後続するサブフレームをP2シンボルと同じV-SISOサブフレームとしていることにより、P2シンボルの残り領域で、V―SISOのPLPを伝送可能である。実施の形態F3の図109に示すサブフレーム構造では、P2シンボルの残り領域をパディングして、次のシンボルから複V/H-MIMOサブフレームとするしかなかった。よって、パディングによるオーバーヘッドを削減することができる。
また、実施の形態E1で示した図83のように第1 Signalling data(8301)、第2 Signalling data(8302)を用いるフレーム構成の場合でも同様にして、フレーム内の適切なサブフレーム順序を有したサブフレーム構造を設けることができる。
以上に示した送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造における適切なサブフレーム順序により、送信アンテナ数や偏波の変化点を削減して受信性能の劣化を抑圧するとともに、パディングによるオーバーヘッドを削減することができる。
また、図119及び図120をサブフレーム構造の例として示したが、これに限らず、H-SISOサブフレーム、V/V-MIMOサブフレーム、V/H-MISOサブフレームを含んで構成してもよい。
また、異なる偏波として、V偏波とH偏波で説明したが、これに限らない。
(実施の形態H4)
実施の形態H3において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮、適切なサブフレーム順序)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H3に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
また、実施の形態E1で示した図83のように第1 Signalling data(8301)、第2 Signalling data(8302)を用いるフレーム構成の場合でも同様にして、sub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを設けてもよい。
以上に示したsub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する送信装置の構成は、図76または図85で示される。但し、実施の形態E1及びH3で説明した点に加えて、フレーム構成部7610が以上に示したsub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する。
また、図121を送信フレーム構造の一例として示したが、これに限らず、H-SISOサブフレーム、V/V-MIMOサブフレーム、V/H-MISOサブフレームを含んで構成してもよい。
また、異なる偏波として、V偏波とH偏波で説明したが、これに限らない。
(実施の形態H5)
実施の形態H1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(適切なサブフレーム順序)ンに基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、更に送信電力切替パターンも考慮したフレーム内の適切なサブフレーム順序について説明する。
図123は、実施の形態H1の図115に示すサブフレーム構造の場合を示す。SISOサブフレームとMISO/MISOサブフレームの切替時においても、送信電力の変化なしになることが分かる。
図126は、図125のサブフレーム構造に対して、MISO/MISOサブフレームとSISOサブフレームの順序を入れ替えた場合を示す。引き続き、フレーム内において送信電力の変化が発生しないことが分かる。よって、受信側で特にAGC処理に対する影響を防止するためには、SISOとMISO/MIMOに無関係に、送信電力に差がないものどうしを前後のサブフレームとすればよいことが分かる。これにより、サブフレーム順序の自由度が上がる。
(実施の形態H6)
実施の形態H5において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(適切なサブフレーム順序、送信電力切替パターンも考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H5に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
また、実施の形態E1で示した図83のように第1 Signalling data(8301)、第2 Signalling data(8302)を用いるフレーム構成の場合でも同様にして、sub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを設けてもよい。
以上に示したsub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する送信装置の構成は、図76または図85で示される。但し、実施の形態E1及びH5で説明した点に加えて、フレーム構成部7610が以上に示したsub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する。
また、図127を送信フレーム構造の一例として示したが、これに限らない。
(実施の形態H7)
実施の形態H3において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮、適切なサブフレーム順序)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、更に送信電力切替パターンも考慮したフレーム内の適切なサブフレーム順序について説明する。
図129は、実施の形態H3の図119に示すサブフレーム構造の場合を示す。V-SISOサブフレームとV/V-MISOサブフレームの切替時においても、偏波一定・送信電力の変化なしになることが分かる。
よって、受信側で特にAGC処理に対する影響を防止するためには、SISOとMISO/MIMOに無関係に、偏波一定かつ送信電力に差がないものどうしを前後のサブフレームとすればよいことが分かる。これにより、サブフレーム順序の自由度が上がる。
また、図129~図132をサブフレーム構造の例として示したが、これに限らず、H-SISOサブフレーム、V/V-MIMOサブフレーム、V/H-MISOサブフレームを含んで構成してもよい。
(実施の形態H8)
実施の形態H7において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(適切なサブフレーム順序、偏波を考慮、送信電力切替パターンも考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H7に対して、受信側で伝送路推定向上を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
以上に示したsub-frame starting symbolとsub-frame closing symbolを用いた送信フレーム構造により、受信側における伝送路推定向上を可能とする。
また、図133を送信フレーム構造の一例として示したが、これに限らない。
(実施の形態H9)
実施の形態H1において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(適切なサブフレーム順序)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H1に対して、受信電力の瞬時的変化に対して、受信側で特にAGCの高速追従を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
(1)短い時間長の信号(オーバーヘッド削減のため)
(2)サブフレームに対して、できるだけ多くの周波数域の成分を含む信号
(3)時間領域で振幅ができるたけ一定である信号(AGC高速同期のため)
(4)相関性の高い信号(マルチパス環境でも、相関による高いマッチング性のため)
これらの性質を満たす信号として、例えば、チャープ信号が挙げられる。具体的には、位相特性が周波数及び時間の2次関数で表されるチャープ信号である。但し、AGC同期用プリアンブルはチャープ信号に限らない。
実施の形態H1で示した図116のようにSignalling PLP(7801)を設け、DVB-T2規格以外の規格で必要となる制御情報(一部でもよい、つまり、L1 Post-Signalling dataとSignalling PLPの両者で伝送する)を伝送する場合も同様にして、AGC同期用プリアンブルを設けてもよい。
以上に示したAGC同期用プリアンブルを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する送信装置の構成は、図76または図85で示される。但し、実施の形態E1及びH1で説明した点に加えて、フレーム構成部7610が以上に示したAGC同期用プリアンブルを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する。
また、図134、図135を送信フレーム構造の一例として示したが、これに限らない。
(実施の形態H10)
実施の形態H3において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(偏波も考慮、適切なサブフレーム順序)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H3に対して、受信電力の瞬時的変化に対して、受信側で特にAGCの高速追従を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
実施の形態E1で示した図78のようにSignalling PLP(7801)を設け、DVB-T2規格以外の規格で必要となる制御情報(一部でもよい、つまり、L1 Post-Signalling dataとSignalling PLPの両者で伝送する)を伝送する場合も同様にして、AGC同期用プリアンブルを設けてもよい。
以上に示したAGC同期用プリアンブルを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する送信装置の構成は、図76または図85で示される。但し、実施の形態E1及びH3で説明した点に加えて、フレーム構成部7610が以上に示したAGC同期用プリアンブルを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する。
また、図136、図137を送信フレーム構造の一例として示したが、これに限らず、H-SISOサブフレーム、V/V-MIMOサブフレーム、V/H-MISOサブフレームを含んで構成してもよい。
また、異なる偏波として、V偏波とH偏波で説明したが、これに限らない。
(実施の形態H11)
実施の形態H5において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(適切なサブフレーム順序、送信電力切替パターンも考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H5に対して、受信電力の瞬時的変化に対して、受信側で特にAGCの高速追従を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
実施の形態E1で示した図78のようにSignalling PLP(7801)を設け、DVB-T2規格以外の規格で必要となる制御情報(一部でもよい、つまり、L1 Post-Signalling dataとSignalling PLPの両者で伝送する)を伝送する場合も同様にして、送信電力の変化点が存在しない場合には、AGC同期用プリアンブルを適用しなくてもよい。但し、送信電力の変化点が存在する場合には、AGC同期用プリアンブルを適用してもよい。
(実施の形態H12)
実施の形態H7において、送信アンテナのコンフィギュレーション(適切なサブフレーム順序、偏波を考慮、送信電力切替パターンも考慮)に基づいたサブフレーム構造を適用する場合について説明した。本実施の形態では、実施の形態H7に対して、受信電力の瞬時的変化に対して、受信側で特にAGCの高速追従を可能とする送信フレーム構造に関して説明する。
実施の形態E1で示した図78のようにSignalling PLP(7801)を設け、DVB-T2規格以外の規格で必要となる制御情報(一部でもよい、つまり、L1 Post-Signalling dataとSignalling PLPの両者で伝送する)を伝送する場合も同様にして、AGC同期用プリアンブルを設けてもよい。
以上に示したAGC同期用プリアンブルを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する送信装置の構成は、図76または図85で示される。但し、実施の形態E1及びH7で説明した点に加えて、フレーム構成部7610が以上に示したAGC同期用プリアンブルを用いた送信フレーム構造を生成する。
また、図138~図141を送信フレーム構造の一例として示したが、これに限らず、H-SISOサブフレーム、V/V-MIMOサブフレーム、V/H-MISOサブフレームを含んで構成してもよい。
また、異なる偏波として、V偏波とH偏波で説明したが、これに限らない。
なお、以上の実施の形態H1~H12において、フレームに対するサブフレーム構造を示した。同様にして、スーパーフレームに対するフレーム構造など、長いフレームに対する短いフレーム構造に対して、以上の実施の形態H1~H12の内容を適用してもよい。
ここで、実施の形態H1~H12に係る発明の一実施態様について説明する。実施の形態H1~H12に係る発明の一態様は以下の形態をとってもよい。
(態様1)に係る送信装置は、SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する送信装置であって、送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めてSISOフレームを構成し、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めてMISO/MIMOフレームを構成するフレーム構成部と、前記SISOフレーム、および、前記MISO/MIMOフレームを送信する送信部とを備え、前記フレーム構成部は、制御信号を送信するための制御シンボルと、前記制御シンボルに後続するSISO用のデータまたは前記MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを送信するためのデータシンボルとから、前記SISOフレームまたは前記MISO/MIMOフレームを構成するものであって、前記制御シンボルを送信するためのアンテナの偏波極性を、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルを送信するために用いるアンテナの偏波極性と同一に定めることを特徴とする。
(態様2)に係る送信装置は、SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する送信装置であって、送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めてSISOフレームを構成し、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めてMISO/MIMOフレームを構成するフレーム構成部と、前記SISOフレーム、および、前記MISO/MIMOフレームを送信する送信部とを備え、前記フレーム構成部は、制御信号を送信するための制御シンボルと、前記制御シンボルに後続するSISO用のデータまたは前記MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを送信するためのデータシンボルとから、前記SISOフレームまたは前記MISO/MIMOフレームを構成するものであって、前記制御シンボルを送信するためのアンテナの送信電力を、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルを送信するために用いるアンテナの送信電力と同一に定めることを特徴とする。
(態様3)に係る送信装置は、SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する送信装置であって、送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めてSISOフレームを構成し、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めてMISO/MIMOフレームを構成するフレーム構成部と、前記SISOフレーム、および、前記MISO/MIMOフレームを送信する送信部とを備え、前記フレーム構成部は、制御信号を送信するための制御シンボルと、前記制御シンボルに後続するSISO用のデータまたは前記MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを送信するためのデータシンボルとから、前記SISOフレームまたは前記MISO/MIMOフレームを構成するものであって、前記制御シンボルを送信するためのアンテナの送信電力および偏波極性を、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルを送信するために用いるアンテナの送信電力および偏波極性と同一に定めることを特徴とする。
(態様4)に係る送信装置は、SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する送信装置であって、送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めてSISOフレームを構成し、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めてMISO/MIMOフレームを構成するフレーム構成部と、前記SISOフレーム、および、前記MISO/MIMOフレームを送信する送信部とを備え、前記フレーム構成部は、制御信号を送信するための制御シンボルと、前記制御シンボルに後続するSISO用のデータまたは前記MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを送信するためのデータシンボルとから、前記SISOフレームまたは前記MISO/MIMOフレームを構成するものであって、前記制御シンボルを送信するために用いる送信アンテナ数および偏波極性を、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルを送信するために用いるアンテナの数および偏波極性と同一に定めることを特徴とする。
304A,304B インタリーバ
306A,306B マッピング部
314 信号処理方法情報生成部
308A,308B 重み付け合成部
310A,310B 無線部
312A,312B アンテナ
317A,317B 位相変更部
402 符号化器
404 分配部
504#1,504#2 送信アンテナ
505#1,505#2 受信アンテナ
600 重み付け合成部
701_X,701_Y アンテナ
703_X,703_Y 無線部
705_1 チャネル変動推定部
705_2 チャネル変動推定部
707_1 チャネル変動推定部
707_2 チャネル変動推定部
709 制御情報復号部
711 信号処理部
803 INNER MIMO検波部
805A,805B 対数尤度算出部
807A,807B デインタリーバ
809A,809B 対数尤度比算出部
811A,811B Soft-in/soft-outデコーダ
813A,813B インタリーバ
815 記憶部
819 係数生成部
901 Soft-in/soft-outデコーダ
903 分配部
1201A,1201B OFDM方式関連処理部
1302A,1302A シリアルパラレル変換部
1304A,1304B 並び換え部
1306A,1306B 逆高速フーリエ変換部
1308A,1308B 無線部
Claims (10)
- SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する送信装置であって、
送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めてSISOフレームを構成し、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めてMISO/MIMOフレームを構成するフレーム構成部と、
前記SISOフレーム、および、前記MISO/MIMOフレームを送信する送信部とを備え、
前記フレーム構成部は、制御信号を送信するための制御シンボルと、前記制御シンボルに後続するSISO用のデータまたは前記MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを送信するためのデータシンボルとから、前記SISOフレームまたは前記MISO/MIMOフレームを構成するものであって、前記制御シンボルを送信するための送信アンテナ数を、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルを送信するために用いる送信アンテナ数と同一の数に定める
ことを特徴とする送信装置。 - 前記フレーム構成部は、前記制御シンボルの領域が前記制御信号で満たされない場合に、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルの少なくとも一部を、前記制御シンボルで送信するようにフレームを構成する
ことを特徴とする請求項1記載の送信装置。 - 前記送信装置は、更に、
前記MISO/MIMOフレームについて、少なくとも1つのアンテナから送信される信号の位相を規則的に変更する位相変更部を備え、
前記送信部は、前記位相変更部により位相が変更された信号を送信する
ことを特徴とする請求項1記載の送信装置。 - SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する受信装置であって、
送信装置において、送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めて構成されたSISOフレーム、および、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めて構成されたMISO/MIMOフレームを受信するものであって、前記SISOフレームおよび前記MISO/MIMOフレームは、制御シンボルおよびデータシンボルから成り、制御シンボルおよび当該制御シンボルに後続するデータシンボルは同じ数のアンテナから送信される前記SISOフレームおよび前記MISO/MIMOフレームを受信する受信部と、
前記受信部で受信したフレームを復調して前記SISO用のデータおよび前記MISOおよびMIMO用のデータを得る復調部とを備える
ことを特徴とする受信装置。 - SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する送信装置における送信方法であって、
送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めてSISOフレームを構成し、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めてMISO/MIMOフレームを構成するフレーム構成ステップと、
前記SISOフレーム、および、前記MISO/MIMOフレームを送信する送信ステップとを含み、
前記フレーム構成ステップは、制御信号を送信するための制御シンボルと、前記制御シンボルに後続するSISO用のデータまたは前記MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを送信するためのデータシンボルとから、前記SISOフレームまたは前記MISO/MIMOフレームを構成するものであって、前記制御シンボルを送信するための送信アンテナ数を、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルを送信するために用いる送信アンテナ数と同一の数に定める
ことを特徴とする送信方法。 - SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する受信装置における受信方法であって、
送信装置において、送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めて構成されたSISOフレーム、および、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めて構成されたMISO/MIMOフレームを受信するものであって、前記SISOフレームおよび前記MISO/MIMOフレームは、制御シンボルおよびデータシンボルから成り、制御シンボルおよび当該制御シンボルに後続するデータシンボルは同じ数のアンテナから送信される前記SISOフレームおよび前記MISO/MIMOフレームを受信する受信ステップと、
前記受信ステップで受信したフレームを復調して前記SISO用のデータおよび前記MISOおよびMIMO用のデータを得る復調ステップとを含む
ことを特徴とする受信方法。 - SISO(Single Input Single Output)およびMISO(Multiple Input Single Output)およびMIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output)での通信を実行する機能を有する送信装置であって、
送信対象のデータのうち、SISO用のデータのみを集めてSISOサブフレームを構成し、MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを集めてMISO/MIMOサブフレームを構成し、前記SISOサブフレームおよびMISO/MIMOサブフレームを含んでフレームを構成するフレーム構成部と、
前記フレームを送信する送信部とを備え、
前記フレーム構成部は、制御信号を送信するための制御シンボルと、前記制御シンボルに後続するSISO用のデータまたは前記MISO用のデータおよびMIMO用のデータを送信するためのデータシンボルとから、前記フレームを構成するものであって、前記制御シンボルを送信するための送信アンテナ数を、前記制御シンボルに続くデータシンボルを送信するために用いる送信アンテナ数と同一の数に定める
ことを特徴とする送信装置。 - 前記フレーム構成部は、前記SISOサブフレームまたはMISO/MIMOサブフレームの少なくとも一方の先頭データシンボルに、他のデータシンボルよりパイロットシンボルの密度が高いstarting symbolを設ける
ことを特徴とする請求項7記載の送信装置。 - 前記フレーム構成部は、前記SISOサブフレームまたはMISO/MIMOサブフレームの少なくとも一方の最終データシンボルに、他のデータシンボルよりパイロットシンボルの密度が高いclosing symbolを設ける
ことを特徴とする請求項7記載の送信装置。 - 前記フレーム構成部は、前記SISOサブフレームまたはMISO/MIMOサブフレームの少なくとも一方の先頭に、AGC(Automatic Gain Control)用信号を設ける
ことを特徴とする請求項7記載の送信装置。
Priority Applications (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201280031066.6A CN103843272B (zh) | 2011-06-24 | 2012-06-21 | 发送装置、发送方法、接收装置及接收方法 |
JP2013521466A JP5627780B2 (ja) | 2011-06-24 | 2012-06-21 | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 |
US14/123,873 US20140105322A1 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2012-06-21 | Transmission device, transmission method, receiving device and receiving method |
EP12803175.4A EP2597805A4 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2012-06-21 | SENDING DEVICE, TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE, RECEPTION DEVICE AND RECEPTION PROCEDURE |
US14/843,349 US20150381256A1 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2015-09-02 | Transmission device, transmission method, receiving device and receiving method |
US15/966,369 US20180248609A1 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2018-04-30 | Transmission device, transmission method, receiving device and receiving method |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2011140792 | 2011-06-24 | ||
JP2011-140792 | 2011-06-24 |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/123,873 A-371-Of-International US20140105322A1 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2012-06-21 | Transmission device, transmission method, receiving device and receiving method |
US14/843,349 Continuation US20150381256A1 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2015-09-02 | Transmission device, transmission method, receiving device and receiving method |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2012176459A1 true WO2012176459A1 (ja) | 2012-12-27 |
Family
ID=47422315
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2012/004036 WO2012176459A1 (ja) | 2011-06-24 | 2012-06-21 | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (3) | US20140105322A1 (ja) |
EP (2) | EP2597805A4 (ja) |
JP (5) | JP5627780B2 (ja) |
CN (1) | CN103843272B (ja) |
TW (1) | TWI602413B (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2012176459A1 (ja) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2016533096A (ja) * | 2013-08-09 | 2016-10-20 | クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド | ダウンリンク(dl)チャネルを介したトラフィック通信の効率性を改善するための方法および装置 |
JP2017530637A (ja) * | 2015-02-04 | 2017-10-12 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | 放送信号送受信装置及び方法 |
Families Citing this family (14)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
ES2657428T3 (es) * | 2011-06-24 | 2018-03-05 | Sun Patent Trust | Dispositivo de transmisión, procedimiento de transmisión, dispositivo de recepción y procedimiento de recepción |
US9461773B2 (en) * | 2012-08-09 | 2016-10-04 | Stefano Chinnici | Method and a node for detecting phase noise in MIMO communication systems |
WO2014087674A1 (ja) * | 2012-12-07 | 2014-06-12 | パナソニック株式会社 | 信号生成方法、送信装置、受信方法および受信装置 |
KR20150117155A (ko) * | 2014-04-09 | 2015-10-19 | 한국전자통신연구원 | 다중입력 다중출력 통신 시스템의 연판정 검출 방법 및 장치 |
KR102465856B1 (ko) * | 2015-03-27 | 2022-11-11 | 한국전자통신연구원 | 코어 레이어의 피지컬 레이어 파이프들의 경계를 이용한 방송 신호 프레임 생성 장치 및 방송 신호 프레임 생성 방법 |
WO2016203723A1 (ja) | 2015-06-17 | 2016-12-22 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法、受信方法、送信装置、及び受信装置 |
JP2017011682A (ja) * | 2015-06-17 | 2017-01-12 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 送信方法、受信方法、送信装置、及び受信装置 |
WO2016203750A1 (ja) | 2015-06-19 | 2016-12-22 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法、受信方法、送信装置、及び受信装置 |
JP2017011689A (ja) | 2015-06-19 | 2017-01-12 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 送信方法、受信方法、送信装置、及び受信装置 |
CN107888251B (zh) * | 2017-08-25 | 2020-08-07 | 国网山东省电力公司莱芜供电公司 | 多输入多输出电力线通信系统的物理层通信方法 |
JP7168002B2 (ja) * | 2018-12-26 | 2022-11-09 | 日本電気株式会社 | 放送用送信システム、放送用送受信システム、放送用送信方法および放送用送信プログラム |
JP7168001B2 (ja) * | 2018-12-26 | 2022-11-09 | 日本電気株式会社 | 放送用送信システム、放送用送受信システム、放送用送信方法および放送用送信プログラム |
WO2021031077A1 (zh) * | 2019-08-19 | 2021-02-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | 信号传输方法及装置、信号处理方法及装置以及雷达系统 |
WO2021060410A1 (ja) * | 2019-09-27 | 2021-04-01 | 株式会社ソシオネクスト | 復調モジュール |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2005050885A1 (ja) | 2003-11-21 | 2005-06-02 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | マルチアンテナ受信装置、マルチアンテナ受信方法、マルチアンテナ送信装置及びマルチアンテナ通信システム |
JP2009105963A (ja) * | 2001-03-28 | 2009-05-14 | Nokia Corp | 複数アンテナ送信用の非ゼロ複素重み付けした空間−時間符号 |
JP2010193485A (ja) * | 2005-03-31 | 2010-09-02 | Ntt Docomo Inc | 無線通信装置及び無線通信方法 |
JP2010283822A (ja) * | 2009-06-03 | 2010-12-16 | Sony Europe Ltd | 受信装置及び受信方法 |
JP2011029922A (ja) * | 2009-07-24 | 2011-02-10 | Sony Corp | 受信装置および方法、並びにプログラム |
Family Cites Families (19)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP3615065B2 (ja) * | 1998-11-04 | 2005-01-26 | ソニー株式会社 | 無線通信システム及び端末装置 |
JP2005348116A (ja) * | 2004-06-03 | 2005-12-15 | Sharp Corp | 無線通信装置 |
JP4744525B2 (ja) * | 2005-08-22 | 2011-08-10 | パナソニック株式会社 | 基地局装置および移動局装置 |
US8351518B2 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2013-01-08 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Wireless transmitting apparatus, wireless receiving apparatus, wireless communication system, wireless transmitting method and wireless receiving method |
KR100831177B1 (ko) * | 2005-10-08 | 2008-05-21 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 스마트 안테나 통신시스템의 송신기 및 송신 방법 |
US7894417B2 (en) | 2005-11-01 | 2011-02-22 | Nokia Corporation | Signal arrangement for multi-bandwidth OFDM system |
CN101039136B (zh) * | 2006-03-15 | 2011-09-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | 基于空频编码的多天线发射分集方法及其系统 |
JP4257347B2 (ja) * | 2006-07-11 | 2009-04-22 | 株式会社東芝 | 通信装置、表示端末および通信プログラム |
JP2008066780A (ja) | 2006-09-04 | 2008-03-21 | Toshiba Corp | 基地局装置及び無線通信システム |
EP2227061B1 (en) | 2007-01-31 | 2012-09-19 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Interference information indicator table for a mobile station located at a cell edge |
US8811352B2 (en) * | 2007-06-04 | 2014-08-19 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method and apparatus for channel estimation in a transmit diversity environment |
WO2009028911A2 (en) * | 2007-08-30 | 2009-03-05 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus for transmitting and receiving a signal and method for transmitting and receiving a signal |
EP2071794B1 (en) * | 2007-12-12 | 2010-03-24 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus for transmitting and receiving a signal and method of transmitting and receiving a signal |
KR101162805B1 (ko) * | 2008-02-21 | 2012-07-05 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 무선 디지털 방송 시스템에서 제어 정보 송/수신 장치 및방법 |
JP5347792B2 (ja) * | 2009-07-16 | 2013-11-20 | ソニー株式会社 | 信号処理装置、信号処理方法、及び、受信システム |
WO2011043618A2 (ko) * | 2009-10-08 | 2011-04-14 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 방송 신호의 송수신 방법 및 장치 |
JP5476981B2 (ja) * | 2009-12-25 | 2014-04-23 | ソニー株式会社 | 受信装置及び方法、プログラム、並びに受信システム |
GB2478005B (en) * | 2010-02-23 | 2017-06-14 | Univ Court Univ Of Edinburgh | Enhanced spatial modulation |
EP2540008B1 (en) * | 2010-02-25 | 2013-12-11 | Sony Corporation | Mapping apparatus and method for transmission of data in a multi-carrier broadcast system |
-
2012
- 2012-06-21 WO PCT/JP2012/004036 patent/WO2012176459A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2012-06-21 CN CN201280031066.6A patent/CN103843272B/zh active Active
- 2012-06-21 EP EP12803175.4A patent/EP2597805A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2012-06-21 JP JP2013521466A patent/JP5627780B2/ja active Active
- 2012-06-21 US US14/123,873 patent/US20140105322A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2012-06-21 EP EP15160542.5A patent/EP2908453B1/en active Active
- 2012-06-22 TW TW101122465A patent/TWI602413B/zh active
-
2014
- 2014-09-29 JP JP2014198043A patent/JP5890500B2/ja active Active
-
2015
- 2015-09-02 US US14/843,349 patent/US20150381256A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2016
- 2016-02-18 JP JP2016028535A patent/JP6281780B2/ja active Active
-
2018
- 2018-01-10 JP JP2018001906A patent/JP6593612B2/ja active Active
- 2018-04-30 US US15/966,369 patent/US20180248609A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2019
- 2019-09-10 JP JP2019164104A patent/JP7038295B2/ja active Active
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2009105963A (ja) * | 2001-03-28 | 2009-05-14 | Nokia Corp | 複数アンテナ送信用の非ゼロ複素重み付けした空間−時間符号 |
WO2005050885A1 (ja) | 2003-11-21 | 2005-06-02 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | マルチアンテナ受信装置、マルチアンテナ受信方法、マルチアンテナ送信装置及びマルチアンテナ通信システム |
JP2010193485A (ja) * | 2005-03-31 | 2010-09-02 | Ntt Docomo Inc | 無線通信装置及び無線通信方法 |
JP2010283822A (ja) * | 2009-06-03 | 2010-12-16 | Sony Europe Ltd | 受信装置及び受信方法 |
JP2011029922A (ja) * | 2009-07-24 | 2011-02-10 | Sony Corp | 受信装置および方法、並びにプログラム |
Non-Patent Citations (19)
Title |
---|
"A tutorial on 'Parallel concatenated (Turbo) coding', 'Turbo (iterative) decoding' and related topics", IEICE, TECHNICAL REPORT IT98-51 |
"Achieving near-capacity on a multiple-antenna channel", IEEE TRANSACTION ON COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 51, no. 3, March 2003 (2003-03-01), pages 389 - 399 |
"Advanced signal processing for PLCs: Wavelet-OFDM", PROC. OF IEEE INTERNATIONAL SYMPOSIUM ON ISPLC 2008, 2008, pages 187 - 192 |
"BER performance evaluation in 2x2 MIMO spatial multiplexing systems under Rician fading channels", IEICE TRANS. FUNDAMENTALS, vol. E91-A, no. 10, October 2008 (2008-10-01), pages 2798 - 2807 |
"Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB);Frame structure channel coding and modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial television broadcasting system (DVB-T2)", ETSI EN 302 755 V1.1.1, September 2009 (2009-09-01), pages 17 - 20, 55-75 * |
"Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB);Frame structure channel coding and modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial television broadcasting system (DVB-T2)", ETSI EN 302 755 V1.2.1, October 2010 (2010-10-01), pages 92 - 93 * |
"Likelihood function for QR-MLD suitable for soft-decision turbo decoding and its performance", IEICE TRANS. COMMUN., vol. E88-B, no. 1, January 2004 (2004-01-01), pages 47 - 57 |
"Performance analysis and design optimization of LDPC-coded MIMO OFDM systems", IEEE TRANS. SIGNAL PROCESSING, vol. 52, no. 2, February 2004 (2004-02-01), pages 348 - 361 |
"Second generation framing structure, channel coding and modulation systems for broadcasting, interactive services, news gathering and other broadband satellite applications", ETSI EN 302 307, vol. 1.1.2, June 2006 (2006-06-01) |
"Turbo space-time codes with time varying linear transformations", IEEE TRANS. WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 6, no. 2, February 2007 (2007-02-01), pages 486 - 493 |
D. J. C. MACKAY: "Good error-correcting codes based on very sparse matrices", IEEE TRANS. INFORM. THEORY, vol. 45, no. 2, March 1999 (1999-03-01), pages 399 - 431 |
D. J. LOVE; R. W. HEATH JR.: "Limited feedback unitary precoding for spatial multiplexing systems", IEEE TRANS. INF. THEORY, vol. 51, no. 8, August 2005 (2005-08-01), pages 2967 - 2976 |
L. VANGELISTA; N. BENVENUTO; S. TOMASIN: "Key technologies for next-generation terrestrial digital television standard DVB-T2", IEEE COMMUN. MAGAZINE, vol. 47, no. 10, October 2009 (2009-10-01), pages 146 - I53 |
R. G. GALLAGER: "Low-density parity-check codes", IRE TRANS. INFORM. THEORY, IT-8, 1962, pages 21 - 28 |
S. M. ALAMOUTI: "A simple transmit diversity technique for wireless communications", IEEE J. SELECT. AREAS COMMUN., vol. 16, no. 8, October 1998 (1998-10-01), pages 1451 - 1458 |
See also references of EP2597805A4 |
T. OHGANE; T. NISHIMURA; Y. OGAWA: "Applications of space division multiplexing and those performance in a MIMO channel", IEICE TRANS. COMMUN., vol. E88-B, no. 5, May 2005 (2005-05-01), pages 1843 - 1851 |
V. TAROKH; H. JAFRKHANI; A. R. CALDERBANK: "Space-time block coding for wireless communications: Performance results", IEEE J. SELECT. AREAS COMMUN., vol. 17, no. 3, March 1999 (1999-03-01), pages 451 - 460 |
Y.-L. UENG; C.-C. CHENG: "A fast-convergence decoding method and memory-efficient VLSI decoder architecture for irregular LDPC codes in the IEEE 802.16e standards", IEEE VTC-2007 FALL, pages 1255 - 1259 |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2016533096A (ja) * | 2013-08-09 | 2016-10-20 | クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド | ダウンリンク(dl)チャネルを介したトラフィック通信の効率性を改善するための方法および装置 |
JP2017530637A (ja) * | 2015-02-04 | 2017-10-12 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | 放送信号送受信装置及び方法 |
JP2018500782A (ja) * | 2015-02-04 | 2018-01-11 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | 放送信号送受信装置及び方法 |
US10103915B2 (en) | 2015-02-04 | 2018-10-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus and method for sending and receiving broadcast signals |
US10129061B2 (en) | 2015-02-04 | 2018-11-13 | Lg Electronics, Inc. | Apparatus and method for sending and receiving broadcast signals |
US10530620B2 (en) | 2015-02-04 | 2020-01-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus and method for sending and receiving broadcast signals |
US10911275B2 (en) | 2015-02-04 | 2021-02-02 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus and method for sending and receiving broadcast signals |
US11271785B2 (en) | 2015-02-04 | 2022-03-08 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus and method for sending and receiving broadcast signals |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN103843272B (zh) | 2017-04-05 |
JP2020025269A (ja) | 2020-02-13 |
CN103843272A (zh) | 2014-06-04 |
US20150381256A1 (en) | 2015-12-31 |
JP5627780B2 (ja) | 2014-11-19 |
JP6281780B2 (ja) | 2018-02-21 |
JP5890500B2 (ja) | 2016-03-22 |
JP6593612B2 (ja) | 2019-10-23 |
JP2016123123A (ja) | 2016-07-07 |
EP2908453A1 (en) | 2015-08-19 |
JP2015046886A (ja) | 2015-03-12 |
JPWO2012176459A1 (ja) | 2015-02-23 |
JP7038295B2 (ja) | 2022-03-18 |
JP2018093505A (ja) | 2018-06-14 |
US20180248609A1 (en) | 2018-08-30 |
TWI602413B (zh) | 2017-10-11 |
TW201320670A (zh) | 2013-05-16 |
EP2597805A1 (en) | 2013-05-29 |
EP2908453B1 (en) | 2016-11-23 |
US20140105322A1 (en) | 2014-04-17 |
EP2597805A4 (en) | 2013-07-24 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6350926B2 (ja) | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 | |
JP6593612B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP6347371B2 (ja) | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 | |
JP6115844B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP5753300B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP5866357B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP6176543B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 12803175 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2012803175 Country of ref document: EP |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 14123873 Country of ref document: US |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2013521466 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |